SD200 AC Drive User Manual (Version: V3.

1)
AC DRIVE

Open-loop Vector Type

E
SD 200
AC DRIVE
User Manual

> Z C 10 0 0 <

Version: V3.1
Preface SD200 User Manual

Unpacking Inspection Cautions

Every AC Drive have been tested strictly in factory prior to shipment. Upon unpacking,
check:

Whether the product is damaged;

ª

Whether the nameplate of model and AC drive ratings are consistent with your order.
ª

Whether the box contains the AC drive, certificate of conformity, user manual and
ª
warranty card. If you find any omission or damage, contact Our company or your
supplier immediately.

First-time Use
For the users who use this product for the first time, read the manual carefully. If in doubt
concerning some functions or performances, contact the technical support personnel of
Our company to ensure correct use.

SD200 series AC drives have passed CE test and also meet the
require-ments of following International Standard.

IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2003 Safety requirements for adjustable speed electric drive systems.
ª

IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 adjustable speed electric drive systems:(The third par)the

ª
electromagnetic compatibility standard of the product and its specific test method.

IEC/EN 61000-2-1,2-2,3-2,3-3,4-2,4-3,4-4,4-5,4-6:EMC International and EU Standards.

ª

The instructions are subject to change, without notice, due to product upgrade,
ª
specification modification as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience of
the manual.

-2-
SD200 User Manual Contents

Contents

Preface.................................................................................................................01

Contents..............................................................................................................03

Chapter 1 Safety and Cautions.........................................................................07

1.1 Safety and Cautions Definition..................................................................07
1.2 Safety Cautions.........................................................................................08
1.3 Precautions...............................................................................................10

Chapter 2 Product Information.........................................................................15

2.1 Chapter of This Content............................................................................15
2.2 Basic Principle...........................................................................................15
2.3 Naming Rules............................................................................................17
2.4 Nameplate.................................................................................................17
2.5 SD200 Series of AC drive.........................................................................18
2.6 Technical Specifications............................................................................19
2.7 Structure Diagram.....................................................................................22
2.8 Peripheral Electrical Components System Structure................................27
2.9 SD200 Optional Parts...............................................................................30
2.10 Connection Methods...............................................................................32

Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation............................................35

3.1 Chapter of This Content............................................................................35
3.2 Mechanical Installation..............................................................................36
3.3 Standard Wiring........................................................................................41
3.4 Layout Protection......................................................................................51

Chapter 4 Operation, Display and Application Examples..............................53

4.1 Chapter of this Content.............................................................................53
4.2 Introduction of the Keypad........................................................................54
4.3 Display of Keypad.....................................................................................56
4.4 Keypad Operation.....................................................................................57

Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table................................................................59

5.1 Chapter of this Content.............................................................................59
5.2 Function Parameter Table.........................................................................60

-3-
Contents SD200 User Manual

Chapter 6 Parameter Description.....................................................................91

Group F00: Basic Function Group.........................................................,........92
Group F01: Start-stop Control Group..............................................................99
Group F02: Motor 1 Parameter Group..........................................................104
Group F04: V/Fcontrol Group........................................................................107
Group F05: Input Terminal Group..................................................................113
Group F06: Output Terminal Group...............................................................121
Group F07: HMI Group.................................................................................127
Group F08: Strengthen the Functional Groups.............................................133
Group F09: PID Control Group.....................................................................143
Group F0A:Wobble, Length, Count and Timing Parameter Group..........,....153
Group F0B: Simple PLC and Multi-speed Control Group.............................156
Group F0C: Protection Parameter Group.....................................................160
Group F0D: Motor 2 Parameter Group.........................................................165
Group F0E: Serial Communication Function Group......................................167
Group A01: A1 Curve Setting Function Group..............................................170
Group A02: Status Check Function Group....................................................173
Group A03: DP Parameters Group...............................................................175

Chapter 7 EMC..................................................................................................185
7.1 Definition of Related Terms.....................................................................186
7.2 EMC Standard Introduction.....................................................................186
7.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices.....................................................187
7.4 Shielded Cable........................................................................................191
7.5 Requirement for Leakage Current..........................................................193
7.6 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems................................194

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance...............................................195

8.1 Daily Repair and Maintenance................................................................196
8.2 Warranty Agreement...............................................................................197
8.3 Contents of This Chapter........................................................................197
8.4 Alarm and Fault Inductions......................................................................198
8.5 Fault Reset..............................................................................................198
8.6 Fault History............................................................................................198
8.7 Fault Instruction and Solution..................................................................198
8.8 Common Fault Analysis..........................................................................203

-4-
SD200 User Manual Contents

Chapter 9 Communication Protocol...................................................................209

9.1 Networking Mode....................................................................................209
9.2 Interface Mode........................................................................................210
9.3 Protocol Frame Format...........................................................................210
9.4 Function Protocol....................................................................................211
9.5 Communication Parameters Address.....................................................214

Warranty Agreement
Product warranty card

-5-
-6-
 Chapter 1
Safety and Cautions

1.1 Safety and Cautions Definition

Read this manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding. Installation,
commissioning or maintenance may be performed in conjunction with this chapter. Our
company will assume no ability and responsibility for any injury or loss caused by improper
operation.

Danger
Operations which are not performed comply with the requirements may cause severe hurt
or even death.

Note
Operations which are not performed comply with requirements may cause personal injury
or property damage.

-7-
Chapter 1 Safety and Cautions SD200 User Manual

1.2 Safety Cautions

Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions

ª
Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage,
component missing or damage upon unpacking.
Danger
ª
Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not
conform to the product you received.

Before ª
Handle the equipment with care during transportation to
Installation prevent damage to the equipment.
ª
Do not use the equipment if any component is damaged or
Danger missing. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
ª
Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to
comply will result in static electricity damage.

ª
Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as
metal, and keep it away from combustible materials.
Danger Failures to comply may result in a fire.
ª
Do not loosen the fixed screws of the components,
especially the screws withe red marks.
During ª
Do not drop wire end or screw into the AC drive. Failure it
Installation
will result in damage to the AC drive.
ª
Install the AC drive in places free of vibration and direct
Note sunlight.
ª
When two AC drives are laid in the same cabinet ,arrange
the installation positions properly to ensure the cooling
effect.

ª
A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply
and the AC drive. Failure to comply may result a fire.
ª
Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure
to comply may result in electric shock.
ª
Never connect the power cables to the output
terminals(U,V,W) of the AC drive. Pay attention to the
marks of the wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring.
Failure to comply may result in damage to the AC drive.
At wiring Danger ª
Ensure that the main cable line comply with the standard,
the line meets the EMC requirements and the area safety
standard. Failure to comply may result in risk or accident.
ª
Never connect the power cables the braking resistor
between the DC bus terminals P+, P-. Failure to comply
may result in a fire.

-8-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety and Cautions

Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions

Danger ª
Use a shielded cable for the encoder, and ensure that the
At wiring
shielding layer is reliably grounded.

ª
Please confirm the peripheral equipment and cable
converter is configured in this manual of the recommended
model, all the configuration line in accordance with the
Before connection method of the manual provides the correct
Power-on
Danger
wiring. Failure to comply will result in accidents.
ª
Check that the voltage class of the power supply is
consistent with the rated voltage class of the AC drive.

ª
Do not open the AC drive’s cover after power-on. Failure to
comply may result in electric shock.
ª
Do not touch the operation of AC drive during the hands is
wet. Failure to comply will result in accident.
ª
Do not touch any I/O terminal of the AC drive. Failure to
After
Power-on
Danger comply may result in electric shock.
ª
Do not change the default settings of the AC drive. Failure
to comply will result in damage to the AC drive.
ª
Do not touch the rotating part of the motor during the motor
auto-tuning or running. Failure to comply will result in
accident.

ª
Signal detection must be performed only by qualified
personnel during operation. Failure to comply will result in
Danger personal injury or damage to the AC drive.
ª
Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the
temperature. Failure to comply will result in personal burnt.
During
Operation
ª
Avoid objects falling into the AC drive when it is running.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the AC drive.
Danger ª
Do not start or stop the AC drive by turning the contactor
ON/OFF. Failure to comply will result in damage to the AC
drive.

ª
Do not repair or maintain the AC drive at power-on. Failure
to comply will result in electric shock.
ª
Ensure that the AC drive is disconnected from all power
After suppliers before staring repair or maintenance on the AC
Power-on
Danger drive.
ª
Repair or maintenance of the AC drive may be performed
only by qualified personnel. Failure to comply will result in
personal injury or damage to the AC drive.

-9-
Chapter 1 Safety and Cautions SD200 User Manual

Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions

After ª
Set and check the parameters again after the AC drive is
Danger
Power-on replaced.

1.3 Cautions
1.3.1 Requirement on Residual Current Device(RCD)
The AC drive generates high leakage current during running, which flows earthing (PE)
conductor. Thus install a type-B RCD at the transient and steady-state leakage current to
ground that may be generated at startup and during running of the AC drive. You can
select a specialized RCD with the function of suppressing high harmonics or general-
purpose RCD with relatively large residual current.

1.3.2 Motor Insulation Test

Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, or when it is reused
after being stored for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the poor
insulation of motor windings from damaging the AC drive during the insulation test. A 500-V
mega-Ohm meter is recommended for the test. The insulation resistance must not be less
than 5 MΩ.
UVW
Input terminals of the motor

Megger

Ground

1.3.3 Thermal Protection of Motort

If the selected AC drive does not match the rated capacity of the motor , especially when
the rated power of the AC drive is higher than that of the motor, adjust the parameters for
motor protection in the AC drive or to install thermal relay to protect the motor .

1.3.4 Running Below and Above Rated Frequency

The AC drive provides frequency output of 0 to 600.00Hz. When the users use the
frequency converter for a long time, please pay attention to the motor cooling or use of
variable frequency motor. If the AC drive is required to run at over 50Hz, consider the
capacity of the machine.

-10-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety and Cautions

1.3.5 Vibration of mechanical device

The AC drive may encounter the mechanical resonance point at some output frequencies,
which can be avoided by setting the skip frequency. If the operating frequency of the cus-
tomer coincide with the resonant frequency please modify the operating frequency or
change the inherent resonance frequency of the mechanical system.

1.3.6 Motor heat and noise

The output of the AC drive is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic
frequencies, and therefore, the motor temperature, noise, and vibration are slightly greater
than those when the AC drive runs at power frequency (50 Hz).

1.3.7 Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor on output side of the AC drive

Do not install the capacitor for improving power factor or lightning protection voltagesen-
sitive resistor on the output side of the AC drive because the output of the AC drive is PWM
wave. Otherwise, the AC drive may suffer transient overcurrent or even bedamaged.

AC Driver

U VW

Capacitor or
M voltage-sensitive resistor

1.3.8 Contactor at the I/O terminal of the AC drive

When a contactor is installed between the input side of the AC drive and the power supply,
the AC drive must not be started or stopped by switching the contactor on or off. If the AC
drive has to be operated by the contactor, ensure that the time interval between switching
is at least one hour since frequent charge and discharge will shorten the service life of the
capacitor inside the AC drive.
When a contactor is installed between the output side of the AC drive and the motor,do not
turn off the contactor when the AC drive is active. Otherwise, modules inside the AC drive
may be damaged.

-11-
Chapter 1 Safety and Cautions SD200 User Manual

Contactor KM or
Contactor KM offer switches

R U
380Vac
50/60Hz S
AC Driver
V M
T W

Do not start/stop the AC drive by Turn on /off the contactor

switching the contactor on/off. If when the AC drive has no
the AC drive has to be operated output. Otherwise,modifies
by the contactor, ensure that the inside the AC drive may be
tiome interval is at least one hour. damaged.

1.3.9 The Use Occasion of the External Voltage Out of Rated Voltage Rage
The AC drive must not be used outside the allowable voltage range specified in this
manual. Otherwise, the AC drive’s components may be damaged. If required, use a
corresponding voltage step[-up or step-down device.

1.3.10 The Above Derating of the Default

Different power grade frequency converter has its default carrier frequency, when to run at
a higher carrier frequency, the AC Drive must to reduce the amount when running.

1.3.11 Change Three Phase Input into Two Phase Input

It is not allowed to change the three phase AC drive into two phase one . Otherwise , it
may cause it may cause fault or damage the AC drive.

1.3.12 The Protection of the Lighting Impulse

Although the AC drive has equipped with lightning overvoltage, overcurrent device, which
has a certain protection function for the induction lightining. For the lightning prone areas,
the user is necessary to install lightning protection device at the front of the AC drive, which
will benefit to the service life of the transducer.

1.3.13 Ambient Temperature and De-rating

The normal use of the frequency converter ambient temperature is -10℃ ~40℃ .
Temperature exceeds 40℃ , the equipment need to reduce the amount of use. The ambient
temperature of each increase is reduced by 1.5%, the maximum use of the ambient
temperature is 50℃ .

1.3.14 Altitude and Derating

In places where the altitude is above 1000m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin airit
is necessary to de-rate the AC drive. Contact Our company for technical support.

1.3.15 Some Special Usages

If writing that is not described in this manual, such as common DC bus is applied, contact
the agent or Our company for technical support.

-12-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety and Cautions

1.3.16 The Cautious of the AC drive Disposal

The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explore when they are burnt.
Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burn. Treat them as ordinary
industrial refer to relevant national laws and regulations.

1.3.17 Adaptable Motor

1. The standard parameters of the adaptable motor is adaptable four-squirrel-cage
asynchronous induction motor or PMSM. For other types of motor, select a proper AC drive
according to the rated motor current.

2. The cooling fan and rotor shaft of general AC Drive are coaxial, which results in reduced
cooling effect when the rotational speed declines. If variable speed is required, add a more
powerful fan or replace.

3. The standard parameters of the adaptable motor have been configured inside the AC
drive. It is still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the default values based
on actual conditions. Otherwise, the running result and protection performance will be
affected.

4. The AC drive may alarm or even be damaged when short-circuit exists on cables or
inside the motor. Therefore, perform insulation short-circuit test when the motor and cables
are newly installed or during routine maintenance. During the test, make sure that the AC
drive is disconnected from the tested parts.

-13-
-14-
 Chapter 2
Product Information

2.1 Chapter of This Content

This chapter briefly introduces the operation principle, product features, layout, namepl-ate,
and type of instruction.

2.2 Basic Principle

SD200 is a kind of AC drive used to control asynchronous AC induction motor.
The following figure shows the AC drive main circuit diagram. Rectifie make three-phase
AC voltage into DC voltage. Capacitor groups of intermediate circuit stabilize the DC
voltage .The AC drive converts of the DC voltage to AC voltage for AC motor use. When
the voltage in the circuit exceeds the maximum limit, the braking pipe will connect an
external braking resistor to the intermediate DC circuit to consume the feedback energy.

-15-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

P+ PB

R U
S V
T W

PE PE
P-

Figure 2-1 Main Circuit Diagram( less than 18.5 kw (including))

DC reactor P+

P PB

R U
S V
T W

PE PE
P-

Figure 2-2 Main Circuit Diagram (22kw~30kw)

DC reactor P+

R U
S V
T W

PE PE
P-

Figure 2-3 Main Circuit Diagram (over 30kw)

Note:
1. Higher than 22kw AC drive (including) support for external DC reactor, before
connecting, it need to take down the bronze between P and P +. 1.
2. Lower than 30kw AC drive (including) support for external braking resistor, higher than
37kw AC drive (including) support for external braking unit , braking resistor.

-16-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

2.3 Naming Rules

In the model code contains the product information Users can find the code from the
transducerand simple nameplate.

SD200 - 4T - 11 G 15 P C
1 2 3 4 3 4 5

Field Mark Explanation Content

Ac drive series 1 Ac drive series Sinodrive200 abbreviated SD200
2S:single-phase 220V
Voltage Level 2 Voltage Level 2T:Three-phase 220V
4T:Three-phase 380V

Adaptive Power 3 Adaptive Power 0.7KW~500KW

G:General
Function Type 4 Function Type P:Fan pump

Null :None
braking Unit 5 braking Unit C: Only braking unit

Figure 2-4 Name Designation Rules

2.4 Nameplate

MODEL: SD200-4T-5.5G/7.5P C Model of the AC drive

Rated input voltage,
INPUT: AC3PH 380V 50/60Hz 14.6A/20.5A frequency and current
Rated output voltage,
OUTPUT: AC3PH 380V 0 ~ 600Hz 13A/17A frequency and current
Bar code
S/N: FDLAGCA0A040

SHENZHEN SINOVO ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

Figure 2-4 Name Designation Rules

-17-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

2.5 SD200 Series of AC drive

Power Capacity Input Current Output Current Adaptable Motor

Model (KVA) (A) (A) (KW)
Single-phase 220V Range:-15%~20%
SD200-2S-0.7G 1.5 8.2 4.7 0.75
SD200-2S-1.5G 3.0 14.0 7.5 1.5
SD200-2S-2.2G 4.0 23.0 10.0 2.2
Three-phase 220V Range:-15%~20%
SD200-2T-0.7G 1.5 5.5 4.7 0.75
SD200-2T-1.5G 3.0 7.7 7.5 1.5
SD200-2T-2.2G 4.0 12.0 10.0 2.2
Three-phase 380V Range:-15%~20%
SD200-4T-0.7G 1.5 3.4 2.3 0.75
SD200-4T-1.5G 3.0 5.0 3.7 1.5
SD200-4T-2.2G 4.0 5.8 5.1 2.2
SD200-4T-4.0G 5.9 10.5 8.5 4.0
SD200-4T-5.5G 8.9 14.6 13 5.5
SD200-4T-7.5G 11 20.5 17 7.5
SD200-4T-11G 17 26.0 25 11
SD200-4T-15G 21 35.0 32 15
SD200-4T-18.5G 24 38.5 37 18.5
SD200-4T-22G 30 46.5 45 22
SD200-4T-30G 40 62.5 60 30
SD200-4T-37G 57 76.0 75 37
SD200-4T-45G 69 92.0 91 45
SD200-4T-55G 85 113 112 55
SD200-4T-75G 114 157 150 75
SD200-4T-90G 134 180 176 90
SD200-4T-110G 160 214 210 110
SD200-4T-132G 192 256 253 132
SD200-4T-160G 231 307 304 160
SD200-4T-185G 255 333 330 185
SD200-4T-200G 287 380 377 200
SD200-4T-220G 311 429 426 220
SD200-4T-250G 355 470 465 250
SD200-4T-280G 396 525 520 280
SD200-4T-315G 439 605 600 315

-18-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

Power Capacity Input Current Output Current Adaptable Motor

Model (KVA) (A) (A) (KW)

SD200-4T-350G 479 665 660 350

SD200-4T-400G 530 730 725 400
SD200-4T-450G 600 825 820 450
SD200-4T-500G 660 910 900 500

Note:
1. 0.75 ~ 315 kw AC drive input current is the measured results, which under the condition
of input voltage 380V, and without DC reactor as well as input and output reactor;

2. 350 ~ 500 kw AC drive input current is the measured results, which under the condition
of input voltage 380V, and equipped with input reactor;

3. Rated output current is defined as the output current of the output voltage 380V.

2.6 Technical Specifications

Item Specification
Maximum frequency 0~600Hz
2.0kHz~16.0kHz； The carrier frequency is automatically adjusted
Carrier frequency
based on the load features.
Input frequency Digital setting: 0.01Hz
resolution Analog setting : Maximum frequency x 0.025%
0:V/F control
Control mode
1:Vector control 0 mode

Speed range 1:50(vector control 0 mode)

Overload capacity G type:150% rated current for 60s P type: 110% rated current for 60s
Torque boost Auto torque boost Manual torque boost: 0.1%~20.0%
Basic Function

V/F curve Line Multi-point Square V/F curve VF separation

Accelerate/ Line or S-curve Acc/Dec mode, four kinds of Acc/Dec time Range of
Decelerate curve Acc/Dec time 0.0~6000.0s
DC braking frequency : 0.00Hz to Maximum frequency
DC braking braking time: 0.0 to 100.0s
braking current : 0.0 to 150%
Jog control Jog frequency range: 0.00Hz~F00.03Maximum frequency
Simple PLC Multi-speed 16-speed operating through built-in PLC or control terminal
Onboard PID It realizes process-controlled closed loop control system easily.

Auto voltage
Jog frequency range: 0.00Hz~Maximum frequency
regulation (AVR)
The current and voltage are limited automatically during
Overvoltage/overcurrent the running process so as to avoid frequent tripping due to
stall control overvoltage/overcurrent.
Rapid current limit It helps to avoid frequent over- current faults of the AC drive.

-19-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

Item Specification
Load feedback energy compensates the voltage reduction so that
Non stop function the AC drive can continue to run in a short time in case of power
interruption.
Identify the speed of rapidly rotating motor to realize a smooth start
Speed tracking start
without any rush.
Rapid software and hardware current limiting technology helps to
Freatures

Rapid current limit

avoid frequent over-current fault.

Virtual IO Four sets of virtual DO, five groups of virtual DI, enables easy logic
control.
Timing Control Timing control: set the time range 0.0Min~6500.0Min
Two independent motor parameters enable two motors switching
Multi-motor switch
control
Bus Support Two independent Modbus communication, profibus-DP
Motor overheating Optional IO expansion card 1, analog input AI5 acceptable the input
protection of motor temperature sensor .(PT100,PT1000)
Given the control panel, control terminal, serial communication port
Command source
given. It can be switched by a variety of ways.
12 frequency sources: digital setting, analog voltage setting, analog
Frequency source current setting, pulse setting and serial port. It can be switched by a
variety of ways.
Auxiliary frequency 12 auxiliary frequency source. Flexible implementation of auxiliary
source frequency tuning, frequency synthesis.
Standard:
. Six digital input terminals, one of which support to 50kHz high-
Running

speed pulse input

. Three analog input terminals, two of which supports -10V~10V
voltage input
Input terminal
. One support 0 ~ 10V voltage input or 0 ~ 20mA current input
Expansion capability:
. Two digital inputs
. One analog input terminal, support 0-10.00V (0-20mA) input, and
supports PT100 / Pt1000
Standard:
. One high-speed pulse output terminal (optional open collector
type), support of 0 ~ 50kHz square wave signal output
Output terminal . One digital output terminal
. Two relay output terminals
. Two analog output terminals, support 0~20mA current output or
0~10V voltage output
LED display Display each parameter of function code group
The key lock and Achieve some or all of the keys locked and define the scope of
function selection partial keys to prevent misuse.
Display and
operation

Powered motor short circuit test; Input/output phase failure protec-

Protection function tion; Over current protection; voltage protection; Under voltage pr-
otection; Over heat protection ; Overload protection; braking resis-
Protection function tor fault protection.
Brake unit, Simple IO expansion card, Multi-functional IO expansion
Accessories
card

-20-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

Item Specification
In-door, free from direct sunlight, dust, corrosive gas, combustible
Application environment
ga , oil mist, steam , water drop and salt .
Environment

Altitude Lower than 1000m (1000m-3000m for derated use)

Ambient temperature -10℃+40℃ (derated use in the ambient temperature of 40℃ to 50 ℃ )
Humidity Less than 95%RH, without condensation
Vibration Less than 5.9m/s(0.6g)
Storage temperature -20℃~+60℃

-21-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

2.7 Structure diagram

2.7.1 The following figure shows the layout of the AC drive
( 2.2KW,for example).

2
8

3
4
9 5
6
10
7
11

12

Figure 2-6 Product structure diagram

No Name Description

1 Fan-cover Protection fan.

2 Cooling fan Refer to 8.1 " Definition of Related Terms."
3 Keypad interface It is used to connect the Keypad.
Optional. with the vents-cover installed, the protection level will
4 Vents-cover increase and the AC drive internal temperature will increase as
well so please derating use the AC drive.
5 Nameplate Refer to 2.4 "Nameplate"
6 Control terminals Refer to 3.3 "Standard Wiring."
."
7 Main circuit terminals Refer to 3.3 "Standard Wiring."
8 Keypad Refer to chapter4 "Operation, Display and Application Examples."
9 Cabinet-cover Protect the internal components.
10 Series Label Refer to 2.3 "Naming Rules".
11 Apron Convenient input and output wiring.
12 Lower-cover Protect the internal components.

-22-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

2.7.2 Product Outline, Installation Hole Size

2.7.2.1 SD200 series less than7.5KW (including 7.5KW)
Ø
H1
H

W1 D
W

Figure 2-7 Less than 7.5 KW AC drive installation dimensions and installation size

AC drive model H(mm) W(mm) D(mm) H1(mm) W1(mm) Diameter

(mm) GW(kg)
SD200-2S-0.7G
SD200-2S-1.5G 190 110 150 178 98 Ø5 2.4
SD200-2S-2.2G
SD200-2T-0.7G
SD200-2T-1.5G 190 110 150 178 98 Ø5 2.4
SD200-2T-2.2G
SD200-4T-0.7G
SD200-4T-1.5G 190 110 150 178 98 Ø5 2.4
SD200-4T-2.2G
SD200-4T-4.0G 210 130 160 198 118 Ø5 3.5
SD200-4T-5.5G
250 155 176 236 141 Ø5 4.5
SD200-4T-7.5G

-23-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

2.7.2.2 SD200 Series 11KW~45KW

H1
H

W1 D
W
Figure 2-8 11kw~45kw AC drive installation dimensions and installation size

AC drive model H(mm) W(mm) D(mm) H1(mm) W1(mm) Diameter GW(kg)

(mm)
SD200-4T-11G 285 170 162 270 135 Ø6 6.5
SD200-4T-15G
332 220 214 318 140 10.3
SD200-4T-18.5G
SD200-4T-22G 13
387 250 220 373 150 Ø7
SD200-4T-30G 15
SD200-4T-37G
440 270 252 426 180 22.5
SD200-4T-45G

2.7.2.3 SD200 Series 55KW~110KW

H1
H

W1 D
W

Fig 2-9 55~110KW AC drive installation dimensions and installation size

AC drive model H(mm) W(mm) D(mm) H1(mm) W1(mm) Diameter

(mm) GW(kg)
SD200-4T-55G 550 300 258 534 200 35.6
SD200-4T-75G 53
Ø9
SD200-4T-90G 650 370 282 625 250 54
SD200-4T-110G 55

-24-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

2.7.2.4 SD200 Series 132KW~185KW

H1
H

W1 D
W

Figure 2-10 132KW~185KW AC drive installation dimensions and installation size

AC drive model H(mm) W(mm) D(mm) H1(mm) W1(mm) Diameter

(mm) GW(kg)
SD200-4T-132G
SD200-4T-160G 880 485 310 860 320 Ø13 99
SD200-4T-185G

2.7.2.5 SD200 Series 200KW~500KW

H1
H

W1 D
W

Figure 2-11 200KW~500KW AC drive installation dimensions and installation size

-25-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

AC drive model H(mm) W(mm) D(mm) H1(mm) W1(mm) Diameter

(mm) GW(kg)
SD200-4T-200G
SD200-4T-220G 1250 500 400 1000 440 Ø13 167
SD200-4T-250G
SD200-4T-280G
SD200-4T-315G 1350 650 400 1105 513 Ø13 206
SD200-4T-350G
SD200-4T-400G
SD200-4T-450G 1810 850 405 1410 513 Ø13 415
SD200-4T-500G

2.7.3 External Keypad Installation Dimensions 128.20

119.00

79.00
1.50

74.80

Figure 2-12 Keypad Installation dimensions

119.5 +0.3
0

+0.3
0
100

70

Figure 2-13 Figure 2-14

Opening dimension diagram Opening dimension diagram
for keypad with base for keypad without base

-26-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

2.8 Peripheral Electrical Components System Structure

When using SD200 series AC drive to control asynchronous motor system, you have to
install various electrical components on the side of input and output of the AC drive to
guarantee the stability and safety of system.In addition, SD200 series AC drive is equipped
with a variety of optional accessories and expansion card to achieve various functions.
More than 37kw series three-phase 380v system structure as shown in the figure
below(The figure AC drive terminal refer to 55~110KW):

Use within the allowable power supply specification

3-phase AC
of the AC drive
power supply

Moulded case
circuit breakeror Select a proper breaker to resistlarge in-rush current
earth leakage that flows into the AC drive at power-on
circuit breakers

To guarantee safety, use an electromagnetic contactor.

Electromagnetic
Do not use it to start or stop the AC drive because such
contactor
operation reduces the service life of the AC drive

Suppress the high

AC reactor order harmonic to
improve power factor

AC Driver

Reduce the electrom-

Input side EMC agnetic interference
filter on the input side.
P P+ P- R S T U V W PE

Ground

Output reactors
Break unit

PB P P+ P- Motor

Braking resistor
BR

P+
Ground

Figure 2-15 Under 37 kw series 3-phase 380 V system structure diagram

-27-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

2.8.1 Peripheral Electrical Components Description

Accessory Installation Function Description

Name position
Power Interrupt the power supply when overcurrent occurs on
ª
MCCB downstream devices.
receiving side

Start and stop the AC drive.Do not start and stop the AC
ª
Between MCCB drive frequently by switching the contactor on and off (less
Contactor and the AC drive than twice per minute) nor use it to directly start the AC
input side drive.

Improve the power factor of the input side;

ª
Eliminate the higher harmonics of the input side effecti-vely
ª
and prevent other devices from being damaged due
AC input AC drive to distortion of the voltage waveform;
ª
reactor input side Eliminate the input current unbalance due to unbalance
ª
between the power phases;

Reduce the external conduction and radiation interfere-

ª
ª nce of the AC drive;
EMC input AC drive Decrease the conduction interference flowing from the
ª
filter input side ª power end to the AC drive and improve the anti-interfe-
ª rence capacity of the AC drive.

Improve the input power factor;

ª
SD200 series Improve the efficiency and thermal stability of the AC drive;
ª
AC drive of Eliminate the impact of higher harmonics of the AC drive
ª
200G and above input side and reduce the external conduction and
DC reactor
configured radiation interference.
with DC reactor
as standard

The output side of the AC drive generally has much higher

ª
harmonics. When the motor is far from the AC drive, there
is much distributed capacitance in the circuit and certain
harmonics may cause resonance in the circuit, bringing
Between the AC about the following two impacts:
drive output side a.Degrade the motor insulation performance and damage
AC output ª
and the motor, the motor in the long run.
reactor
close to the AC ª b.Generate large leakage current and cause frequent AC
drive drive protection trips.
If the distance between the AC drive and the motor is
ª
greater than 100 m, install an AC output reactor.

-28-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

Note:
1. Do not install capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the AC drive. Otherwise, it
may cause faults to the AC drive or damage to the capacitor and surge suppressor;

2. Input/output (main circuit) of the AC drive include harmonic components, which may interfere
with the AC drive attachment communications equipment. Therefore, install an anti-aliasing filter
to minimize the interference;

3. Details of peripherals and options refer to Chapter 2 selection of peripheral devices.

2.8.2 Peripheral electrical components selection guidance

Recommended Recommended Recommended

Recommended
AC Drive model MCCB(A) input side main output side main control loop
contactor
circuit wire mm2 circuit wire mm2 wire mm2
Single phase 220V
SD200-2S-0.7G 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
SD200-2S-1.5G 20 16 4.0 2.5 1.0
SD200-2S-2.2G 32 20 6.0 4.0 1.0
Three phase 220V
SD200-2T-0.7G 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
SD200-2T-1.5G 25 16 4.0 2.5 1.0
SD200-2T-2.2G 25 16 4.0 4.0 1.0
Three phase 380V
SD200-4T-0.7G 10 6 2.5 2.5 1.0
SD200-4T-1.5G 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
SD200-4T-2.2G 16 10 2.5 2.5 1.0
SD200-4T-4.0G 25 16 4.0 4.0 1.0
SD200-4T-5.5G 32 25 4.0 4.0 1.0
SD200-4T-7.5G 40 30 4.0 6.0 1.0
SD200-4T-11G 63 40 4.0 6.0 1.0
SD200-4T-15G 63 40 6.0 10 1.0
SD200-4T-18.5G 100 63 6 10 1.5
SD200-4T-22G 100 63 10 10 1.5
SD200-4T-30G 125 100 16 16 1.5
SD200-4T-37G 160 100 16 25 1.5
SD200-4T-45G 200 125 25 25 1.5
SD200-4T-55G 250 160 50 35 1.5
SD200-4T-75G 210 160 60 50 1.5

-29-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

Recommended Recommended Recommended

Recommended
AC Drive model MCCB(A) input side main output side main control loop
contactor
circuit wire mm2 circuit wire mm2 wire mm2
SD200-4T-90G 250 160 70 50 1.5
SD200-4T-110G 350 350 120 120 1.5
SD200-4T-132G 400 400 150 150 1.5
SD200-4T-160G 500 400 185 185 1.5
SD200-4T-185G 600 400 185 185 1.5
SD200-4T-200G 600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
SD200-4T-220G 600 600 150*2 150*2 1.5
SD200-4T-250G 800 600 185*2 185*2 1.5
SD200-4T-280G 800 800 185*2 185*2 1.5
SD200-4T-315G 1000 800 150*3 150*3 1.5
SD200-4T-350G 1000 800 150*4 150*4 1.5
SD200-4T-400G 1200 1000 150*4 150*4 1.5
SD200-4T-450G 1200 1000 150*4 150*4 1.5
SD200-4T-500G 1600 1000 150*4 150*4 1.5

2.9 SD200 Optional Parts

Peripheral optional braking unit, each function expansion card and the outer lead operator,
etc..As shown below. Seeing detailed usage instructions for use of the accessory. For the
following options, please note when ordering.

Name Type Function Remark

Models Models power under 22KW are

Internal followed installed with the internal braking For 30KW model power,
braking unit by letter "C” unit as standard configuration the braking unit is optional

External 37KW and above need to be Multiple braking ones are

braking unit SDBUN configured with an external connected in parallel for
braking unit the models above 90KW

Multi-function Increase 3 digital inputs, 2 digital

I/O expansion SDIO outputs, two relay outputs, two It applies to all models
card analog voltage input T_Motor

SDRS485
Modbus One RS - 485 communication
communication card, one CAN communication It applies to all models
card card.
SDCAN

Profibus-DP Profibus-DP card， DB9interface It applies to all models

card SDDP

-30-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

2.9.1 Selection Braking Unit

The section recommend braking assembly is instructional data, user can select different
resistance value and power according to actual situation. (Resistance values can not be
lower than the recommended ones , the power can be higher than recommended ones).
Braking rem inertia, deceleration time, energy of potential energy load. Customs select the
AC drive should comply esistance can be selected according to the power of motor in
actual applied system. They are also related to systwith the actual situation. The bigger of
the system inertia, the shorter of the deceleration time, the more frequent of the braking,
and the braking resistence should select larger power and smaller resistance .

2.9.1.1 The Selection of Resistance Value

When braking, almost all renewable energy consumption of the motor is on the braking
resistor,According to the formula：
ª U*U/R=Pb
U------ Braking voltage at stable braking system.
ª
(System selections differs in braking voltages, The AC380Vsystem usually selects
DC700V braking voltage.)
Pb-----Braking power
ª

2.9.1.2 The Selection of braking Resistor Power

Elevator---20%~30% Open and draw volume---20%~30%

Centrifuge---50%~60% Accidental braking load---5%
Commonly take 10%

2.9.1.3 Selection of Reference

When the AC drive is driven by the control device requiring rapid braking, the braking unit
needs to release the power of the motor braking feedback to the DC bus. 400V voltage
level 0.4 ~30kw is equipped with built-in braking unit, if you need to rapid stop, please refer
to the appropriate braking to select the unit and braking resistance, AC drive capacity, if
need to stop, it can be directly connected to the braking resistance. Please choose the
appropriate braking unit according to the braking resistance of the AC drive capacity.

-31-
Chapter 2 Product Information SD200 User Manual

AC drive Braking Unit Braking Resistor

Capacity
(kw) Specification Quantity Resistance Power Quantity
0.4 1 ≥300Ω 150W 1
0.75 1 ≥300Ω 150W 1
1.5 1 ≥220Ω 150W 1
2.2 1 ≥200Ω 250W 1
4.0 1 ≥130Ω 300W 1
5.5 Built-in as 1 ≥90Ω 400W 1
7.5 standard 1 ≥65Ω 500W 1
11 1 ≥40Ω 800W 1
15 1 ≥32Ω 1000W 1
18.5 1 ≥25Ω 1300W 1
22 1 ≥22Ω 1500W 1
30 1 ≥16Ω 2500W 1
37 Built-in 1 ≥16Ω 3700W 1
45 Optional 1 ≥16Ω 4500W 1
55 1 ≥8Ω 5500W 1
75 2 ≥8Ω 3700W 2
90 2 ≥8Ω 4500W 2
110 EHBU70 2 ≥8Ω 5500W 2
132 3 ≥8Ω 3700W 3
160 3 ≥8Ω 5500W 3
185 4 ≥8Ω 4500W 4
200 4 ≥8Ω 5500W 4
220 4 ≥8Ω 5500W 4

2.10 Connection Methods

2.10.1 Braking Resistor Connection
SD200 series AC drive braking resistor connection as shown in figure 2-16.

P+

Braking
AC Driver resistor

PB

Figure 2-16 braking resistor connection

-32-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information

2.10.2 Braking Unit Connection

SD200 series AC drive and the braking unit connection as shown in figure 2 -17.

P+ + B1

braking Braking
AC Driver resistor
unit

P- － B2

Figure 2-17 braking unit connection

2.10.3 Braking ones in Parallel Connection

When a single braking unit failing to meet the needs of the braking energy, two or more
braking ones are required in parallel connection, as shown in figure 2-18.

P+ + B1

braking Braking
AC Driver resistor
unit

P- － B2

+ B1

braking Braking
unit resistor

－ B2

Figure 2-18 braking ones in parallel connection

-33-
-34-
 Chapter 3
Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.1 Chapter of This Content

This chapter introduce the mechanical and electrical installation of the AC drive.

Danger
Only those who are trained and qualified professionals can operate the work described in
ª
this chapter. Please operate according to the section of "pay attention to security
matters", failure to these may cause personal injury or damage to equipment.
Power supply of AC drive must be disconnected before the installation. If the AC drive has
ª
connected to power, please power off first and then wait not less than the time marked on
the AC drive and confirm the Charge Lamp was already off, users in such condition are
advised to use the multimeter to measure if the DC bus voltage of the AC drive is under
36v.
The installation and design of the AC drive must comply with relevant laws and regulations
ª
of the installation region. If the installation of the AC drive violates the requirements of
local laws and regulations, We Our company does not assume any legal responsibility. In
addition, if user are not comply with the recommendations, the AC drive may appear
some faults not covered by the warranty.

-35-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

3.2 Mechanical Installation

3.2.1 Installation Environment
In order to make full use of the performance of the AC drive and maintain its function for a long
time, it is very important to install the environment. Please install the AC drive in the following
table of the described environment.

Environment Conditions

Installation site Indoor

ª
-10~+50℃.
ª
If the ambient temperature of the AC drive is above 40℃, derate 3% for
every additional 1℃.
ª
It is not recommended to use the AC drive if the ambient temperature is
above 50℃.
ª
In order to improve the reliability of the device, do not use the inverter if
Ambient the ambient temperature changes frequently.
temperature ª
Please provide cooling fan or air conditioner to control the internal
ambient temperature below the required one if the AC drive is used in a
close space such as in the control cabinet.
ª
When the temperature is too low, if the AC drive needs to restart to run
after a long stop, it is necessary to provide an external heating device
to increase the internal temperature, otherwise damage to the devices
may occur.

ª
Rh≤90%
Humidity ª
No condensation is allowed, The maximum relative humidity should be
equal to or less than 60% in corrosive air.

Storage
-30~+60℃
temperature
ª
The installation site of the AC drive should:
ª
keep away from the electromagnetic radiation source；
ª
keep away from contaminative air, such as corrosive gas, oil mist and
Running flammable gas;
Environment ª
ensure foreign objects,such as metal power,dust,oil,water can not enter
Condition into the AC drive(do not install the AC drive on the flammable materials
such as wood)
ª
keep away from direct sunlight,oil mist,steam and vibration environment;

<1000m,If the sea level is above 100m,please derate 1% for every

Altitude
additional 100m.
Vibration ≤5.8m//s²(0.6g)
Installation AC drive should be installed on an upright position to ensure sufficient
direction cooling effect.

-36-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Note:
1. SD200 series AC drive should be installed in a clean and ventilated environment accord-
ing to enclosure classification.
2. Cooling air must be clean,free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust.

3.2.2 Installation Direction

The AC drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet.
The AC drive must be installed in an upright position. Check the installation site according to
the requirements below.Refer to chapter 3.1 outline diagram for frame details.
OK NG NG

A. Vertical installation B. Alinic installation C. Transverse installation

Figure 3-1 Installation direction of AC drive

3.2.3 Installation Manner

Wall mounting(for the AC drive of 380V≤315KW)

Figure3-2 Installation manner

1. Mark the hole location. The location of the holes is shown in the outline diagram in 3.2
charpter;
2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations;
3. Put the AC drive against the wall;
4. Tighten the screws in the wall securely.

-37-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

3.2.4 Single Installation

A
Warm Air C

B B
Cool Air C
A

Figure 3-3 Single installation

Note:
B min. 5MM; C: 30KW below min. 200MM, 37KW above min. 300MM.

3.2.5 Multiple Installation

A Warm Air C

B D B
Cool Air C
A

Figure 3-4 Parallel installation

Note:
1. When installing ac drives with different sizes, align the upper positions of each ac drives
before installing them. This is easy to maintain on later stage.
2. B, D min. size is 5MM; C: 30kw below min. 200MM, 37KW above mini. 300MM

-38-
 SD200 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.2.6 Vertical Installation

Co Wind Board
ol A
ir

Wa
rm
Air

Wind Board
Co
ol A
ir
Wa
rm
Air

Figure 3-5 Vertical installation

Note:
Windscreen should be installed in vertical installation for avoiding mutual impact and
insufficient cooling.

-39-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

3.2.7 Canted Installation

r
Ai
m
ar
W

ir
lA
oo
C
r
Ai
m
ar
W

ir
lA
oo
C

r
Ai
m
ar
W

ir
lA
oo
C

Figure 3-6 Tilt installation

Note:
Ensure the seperation of the wind input and output channels in tilt installation for avoiding
mutual impact..

-40-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.3 Standard Wiring

3.3.1 Main Circuit Wiring Diagram
braking resistor

MCCB PB P+ P-
R R U
S S
18.5KW V M
T T (including)Below W
3-phase 380V PE
input power 50/60HZ

DC reactor

MCCB PB P P+ P-
R R U
V M
S S 22～30KW
T T W
3-phase 380V PE
input power 50/60HZ

braking resistor

braking unit
DC reactor

P P+ P-
MCCB
R R U
37KW V M
S S
T T (including)Above W
3-phase 380V PE
input power 50/60HZ

Figure 3-7 Main circuit wiring diagram

Note:
1. DC reactor, braking unit and braking resistor are optional accessories”.

2. P1 and(+) are short circuited in factory, if need to connect with the DC reactor, please
remove the contact tag between P1 and (+).

3.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals Diagram

P+ P- PB R S T U V W
PE

Figure 3-8 7.5KW below main circuit terminal diagram

-41-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

P++ P
P P-- PB R S T U V W PE

P+ P-
P+ P- PB R S T U V W PE

Figure 3-9 11~18.5kw main circuit terminal diagram

P PP+
+ PP-
- PB R S T U V W PE

P P+ P
P+ - PB R S T
P- U V W PE

Figure 3-10 22kw main circuit terminal diagram

R S T PB P PP+
+ PP-
- U V W PE

R S T PB P P+ P
P+ P-- U V W PE

Figure 3-11 30kw main circuit terminal diagram

R S T P PP++ PP-- U V W PE
POWER(电源)
POWER(电源) MOTOR(电机)
MOTOR(电机)

R S T P PP++ PP-- U V W PE
PO
P O WE
W E R (电
(电 源)
源) M O T OR(电
OR (电 机)
机)

Figure 3-12 37~45kw main circuit terminal diagram

-42-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

P PP++ P-
P- R S T U V W PE
POWER MOTOR

P P+
P + P-
P- R S
POWER(电
T
POWER(电 源)
源)
UM OTO R ((电
V电 机
机)
W
)
PE
PE

Figure 3-13 55~110kw main circuit terminal diagram

R S T P P+ P- U V W PE

R S T P P+ P- U V W PE

Figure 3-14 380V 132~185kw main circuit terminal diagram

Figure 3-15 380V 200~500kw main circuit terminal diagram

-43-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

Terminal Name
Terminal 18.5KW 37KW Function Description
(including) 22~33KW (including)
below above
3-phase AC input terminals
R、S、T Power input of the main circuit which are generally connec-
ted with the power supply.
Three-phase AC output ter-
U、V、W AC drive output minals, general connected to
the motor.
Without the DC reactor DC reactor
P P、P1 and (+) are connected
terminal terminal terminal
with the terminals of DC
DC reactor DC reactor reactor.
Braking resistor terminal brak- terminal P(+) and P(-) are connected
P+
terminal ing resistor braking unit with the terminals of braking
terminal terminal unit.
Braking unit PB and P(+) are connected
P- / /
terminal with the terminals of braking
Braking resistor Braking resistor Without the resistor.
PB
terminal terminal terminal
Protective grounding termin-
als, every machine is provid-
ed 2 PE terminals as the
PE 400V:Grounding resistance is less than 10Ω standard configuration.These
terminals should be grounded
with proper techniques.

Note:
1. Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable. If there is a sysmmetically
constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield,connect
the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the AC drive and motor ends;

2. Braking resistor, braking unit and DC reactor are optional parts;

3. Route the motor cable,input power cable and control cables seperately;

4. If the terminal description is"/",the machine does not provide the terminal as the external
terminal.

-44-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.3.3 Main Circuit Terminal Wiring Process

1. Fasten the grounding conductor of the input power cable with the grounding terminal of the
AC drive(PE)by 360 degree grounding technique. Connect the phase conductors to R, S, and T
terminals and fasten;

2. Strip the motor cable and connect the shield to the grounding terminal of the AC drive by 360
degree grounding technique. Connect the phase conductors to U, V and W terminals and
fasten;

3. Connect the optional brake resistor with a shielded cable to the designated position by the
same procedures in the previous step;

4. Secure the cables outside the AC drive mechanically.

NG Y

Screws are not fastened Screws are fastened

Figure 3-15 Screw installation diagram

OK
PE

Correct grounding method

Enclosure Enclosure

NG

PE
Wrong grounding method
PE
Enclosure Enclosure

Figure 3-16 360-degree grounding technique diagram

-45-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

3.3.4 Control Circuit Wiring Diagram

braking resistor

MCCB
P- P+ PB
R R
U
S S V M
T T W
3-phase380V/480V SD200
Input power 50/60Hz

Main circuit

+24V
DISP1 Keypad interface
OPEN
Digital input 1 DI1
J7 Expansion card interface
Digital input 2 DI2
Digital input 3 DI3 A
485
Digital input 4 DI4 485 communication interface
OFF ON B
Digital input 5 DI5 J3
AO1
High-speed pulse input I V
HDI1 J4 Analog output AO 1,AO2
AO2
I V 0V-10V/0mA-20mA
COM
GND
Analog input
reference voltage HDO1
+10V Open collector output 1
3 （High-speed pulse output）
CME
2 DC：0～10V/0～20mA
AI1 Analog input 1
1kΩ～5kΩ J9
DO1 Open collector output2
1 DC：-10V～10V I V
AI2 Analog input 2
DC：-10V～10V CME
AI3 Analog input 3 T1C

GND T A T1B
Relay output1
S B
T1A

PE(connect cabinet) T2C

T2A Relay output2

Control circuit

Figure 3-17 Wiring diagram of Control Circuit

Note:
This diagram is only suitable for the AC drive’s power rate below SD200-4T-18.5,for other
power rate refer to this chapter 3.3"Main Circuit Terminal Wiring".

-46-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

3.3.5 Control Panel Terminals

A +10V AI2 AO1 AO2 HDI1 DI2 DI4 OPEN +24V COM T1A T1B T1C

B AI1 GND AI3 GND DI1 DI3 DI5 COM CME HDO1 DO1 T2A T2C

Figure 3-18 Control terminal diagram

Control Panel Terminal Function Instructions

Type Terminal Terminal name Specification

Analog input 10.5V(+3%)

+10V reference Maximum output current 25mA/ the potentiometer
voltage resistance range is more than 4KΩ.
GND Analog ground Internal isolated with COM
0~20mA: Input resistance 500Ω, max input current is 25mA

Analog Analog Input 1 0~10V: Input resistance 100KΩ, max input voltage 12.5V
AI1
input Input range: 0–10VDC/0–20 mA, switched by jumper J9 on
the control board and factory defaulted as voltage input.
-10V~10V: Input resistance 25KΩ
AI2 Analog Input 2
Max. input voltage range:-12.5V~+12.5V
-10V~10V: Input resistance 25KΩ
AI3 Analog Input 3
Max input voltage range: -12.5V~+12.5V
0~20mA:Input resistance 200Ω~500Ω

Analog output 1 0~10V: Input resistance >10KΩ

AO1
Input range: 0–10 VDC/4–20 mA, switched by jumper J3 on
the control board and factory defaulted as voltage input.
0~20mA:Input resistance 200Ω~500Ω

Digital Analog output 2 0~10V: Input resistance >10KΩ

AO2
output Input range: 0–10 VDC/4–20 mA, switched by jumper J4 on
the control board and factory defaulted as voltage input.
GND Analog ground Internal isolated with COM
+24V +24V 24V±10%: Internal isolated with GND
Switch the high and low electric level during digital input, it
Digital input
OPEN terminal common was connected with + 24 V short circuit in factory which
means it’s effective when the digital input is with low level.

-47-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

Control Panel Terminal Function Instructions(continued)

Type Terminal Terminal name Specification

COM +24V Internal isolated with GND

Input specification: 24VDC/5mA
DI1~DI5 Digital input 1-5 Frequency range: 0~200Hz
Digital
input Voltage range: 10V~30V
Voltage Pulse input: Maximum frequency 50KHz
High-speed
HDI1 pulse input / Voltage range: 10~30V
digital input 6
Digital input: equal with DI1~DI5

Open collector Voltage range: 0~24V

DO1 output Current range: 0~50mA

High-speed
HDO1 Pulse output: 0~50KHz
pulse output
Digital
output
0~20mA: Input impedance: 500Ω, Max input current: 25mA
DO1/HDO1 CME and COM is internal isolated, but the factory has an
CME Digital output external short circuit (DOI default is + 24V drive). when DO1
public ground driven with an external power supply, it must be disconne-
cted the external shorting of CME and COM.

T1A、 T1A-T1B:NC T1A-T1C:NO

T1B、 Relay 1 output
Relay T1C Contact capacity: 250VAC/5A/30VDC/5A
output
T2A、 T2A-T2C:NO
T2C Relay 2 output
Contact capacity: 250VAC/3A/30VDC/3A

485 differential
A signal + Speed rate1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400
Rs485
commun 485 differential
-ication B signal - Use twisted pair or shielded cable, the longest distance:300m

GND Analog ground Internal isolated with COM

Switching Dial Code Switch Function Description

Jumpers Factory setting
Name Figure Function
ON
Rs485 communication terminating resistor selection
485 ON: 120Ω termination resistor connection is valid OFF
OFF
OFF: Without termination resistor connection
I
I is the current input: 0~20mA.
AI1 V is voltage input: 0~10V. 0～ 10V
V
I
I is current output: 0~20mA.
AO1 V is voltage output: 0~10V. 0～ 10V
V

-48-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Switching Dial Code Switch Function Description(continued)

Jumpers Factory setting
Name Figure Function
I
I is current output: 0~20mA.
AO2 V is voltage output: 0~10V. 0~10V
V

Note:
Speed tracking / closed-loop encoder input only allow appear the following
T S
function selection combination:T and S, or A and B
T/A,S/B T and S group: speed tacking option
T S
A B
A and B group: closed-loop encoder impulse
selection
A B

Choose whether connect PE with GND/COM. When no connection(Jumper is

J14 GND Occcasions with interference, Connect PE on the right side of the control
J14,J15 with GND/COM can improve the ablility to board when you face to the
J15 COM
resist the interference. control board)

Note:
For the selection of the jumper of T/A,S/B, when you choose the speed tracking start func-
tion, please set the combination of T and S.

3.3.6 Input/output signal connection diagram

3.3.6.1 AI Analog input terminal

Weak analog voltage signals are easy to suffer external interference, and therefore the
shielded cable must be used and the cable length must be less than 20 m, as shown in
following figure3-19.In applications where the analog signal suffers severe interference,
install filter capacitor or ferrite magnetic core at the analog signal source, as shown in the
following figure 3-20.

<20米 In the same direction or in the same

direction through about 2 to 3 turns
+10V
AC Driver

AI1
AC Driver

AI1 0.022UF
50V
C
GND

PE GND
Ferrite bead

Fig3-19 Analog input and output Figure 3-20 Analog input terminal
terminal wiring diagram process wiring diagram

-49-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

3.3.6.2 DI Digital Input Terminals

Generally, select shielded cable no longer than 20 m. When active driving is

adopted,necessary filtering measures shall be taken to prevent the interference to the
power supply.
It is recommended to use the contact control mode.

+24V

+24V
+VCC OPEN
Singnal
DI1 2.4K
NPN

3.3Ω
DI5
2.4K
0V COM

External
controller AC drive control board

Figure 3-21 Sink wiring

This is the most commonly used wiring mode. To apply external power supply, remove
jumpers between +24 V and OPEN and connect the 24V positive pole of external power
supply to OPEN and connect the external power 0V to the corresponding DI terminal via
control the contact control.

Note
In this In such wiring mode, the DI terminals of different AC drives cannot be connected in
ª
parallel. Otherwise, DI mal-function may result. If parallel connection (different AC drives) is
required, connect a diode in series at the DI and the diode needs to satisfy the requirement:
IF>10mA, UF <1 V.As shown in Figure 3-22.

+24V AC drive 1
+VCC +24V +24V
+VCC +24V
control board

OPEN 3.3Ω OPEN

信 号
DI1 2.4K DI1 2.4K
COM
NPN PNP
+24V
3.3Ω OPEN 信 号
DI5
DI1 2.4K 2.4K
0V COM COM
0V
External AC drive 2 External AC drive
controller control board controller control board

Figure 3-22 DI terminals connected in Figure 3-23 Source Wiring

parallel in SINK mode

-50-
 SD200 User Manual Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation

In such wiring mode, remove the jumper between +24 V and OP. Connect +24 V to the
common port of external controller and meanwhile connect OP to COM. If external power
supply is applied, remove the jumper between +24V and OPEN,.and connect the OPEN
with the 0V of the external power supply, the external power +24V need to be connected
to the corresponding DI terminal on its way passing the contact control of external
controller.

3.3.6.3 DO Digital Output Terminal

When the digital output terminal needs to drive the relay, an absorption diode shall be
installed between two sides of the relay coil. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the 24
VDC power supply. The driving capacity is not more than 50 mA.

AC Driver +24V
electric relay diode
DO1

CME

COM

Figure 3-24 DO Terminal Wiring diagram

Note
Do not reverse the polarity of the absorption diode during installation. Otherwise, the 24V DC
ª
power supply will be damaged immediately once there is digital output.
When the product leaving factory, digital output CME and COM are external short connect
ª
(Do1 is the default +24V drive). When the DO driven by external power, remove the exter-
nal connection between CME and COM short connection.

3.4 Layout Protection

3.4.1 Protect the AC drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations
Protect the AC drive and input power cable in short circuit situations and against thermal
overload. Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines.

Input cable
M
Fuse 3~
Figure 3-25 Fuse configuration diagram

-51-
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation SD200 User Manual

Note:
Select the fuse as the manual indicated.The fuse will protect the input power cable from da-
mage in short-circuit situations. It will protect the surrounding devices when the internal of
the AC drive is short circuited.

3.4.2 Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations.

The AC drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short-circuit situation when the motor
cable is dimensioned according to the rated current of the AC drive. No additional
protection devices are needed.
Note
If the AC drive is connected to multiple motors, a seperate thermal overload switch or a
ª
circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These devices may
require a seperate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.

3.4.3 Protecting the motor against thermal overload

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the
current must be switched off when overload is detected. The AC drive includes a motor
thermal protection function that protects the motor and closes the output to switch off the
current when necessary.

3.4.4 Implementing a bypass connection

It is necessary to set power frequency and variable frequency conversion circuits for the
assurance of continious normal work of the AC drive if faults occur in some significant
situations.In some special situations, for example, if it is only used in soft start, the AC drive
can be conversed into power frequency running after starting and some corresponding
bypass should be added.

Note
Never connect the supply power to the AC drive output terminals U,V,W.Power line voltage
ª
applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the AC drive.

If frequent shifting is required, employ mechanically connected switches or contactors to

ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line and inverter output
terminals simultaneously.

-52-
 Chapter 4
Operation, Display and Application Examples

4.1 Chapter of This Content

This chapter contains following operation:
Buttons, indicating lights and the screen as well as the methods to inspect, modify and set
function codes by keypad.

-53-
Chapter 4 Operation, Display and Application Examples SD200 User Manual

4.2 Introduction of the keypad

The keypad is used to control SD200 series AC drive, read the state data and adjust par-
ameters.

3
2

Figure 4-1 Keypad diagram

Note:
It is necessary to use M3 screw or installation bracket to fix the external keypad. The
installation bracket for AC drive of 7.5KW is optional but it is standard for the AC drive of
below 11KW.

No. Name Instructions

LED off means that the AC drive is in the stopping state;

LED blinking means the AC drive is in the parameter
RUN/TUNE
autotuning state;
LED on means the AC drive is in the running state.
OFF means the AC drive is in the forward rotation state
FWD/REV
ON means the AC drive is in the reverse rotation state.
Status ○ LOCAL/REMOT: OFF Operation panel control
1
indicator LOCAL/
● LOCAL/REMOT: PN Terminal control
REMOT
○ LOCAL/REMOT: Flash Communication control
LED for faults
LED on when the AC drive is in the fault state;
TRIP
LED off in normal state
LED blinking means the AC drive is in the pre-alarm state.

-54-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation, Display and Application Examples

No. Name Instructions

It represents the current display of the Keypad
Hz A V
Hz Frequency unit
RPM %

Hz A V
A Current unit
Unit RPM %

2 indicator Hz A V
V Voltage unit
RPM %

Hz A V
RPM Speed unit
RPM %

Hz A V % Percentage
RPM %

5-figure LED display displays various monitoring data and alarm code
such as set frequency and output frequency.

Display Correspo- Display Correspo- Display Correspo-

letter nding letter letter nding letter letter nding letter

0 1 2

3 4 5

6 7 8
Code 9 A b
3 Display
Zone C d E

F H I

L N n

o P r

S t U

v . -

When the frequency source A or B is set to 1, the setting of the freque-

Digital ncy source is determined by the analog potentiometer input voltage .
4 potent- The maximum output voltage corresponding to the maximum frequency,
iometer minimum voltage corresponding to 0 Hz
Enter or escape from the first level menu and
Program key
remove the parameter quickly

Entry key Enter the menu step-by-step confirm parameters

Keypad Up key Increase data or function code progressively

5 button
zone Down key Decrease data or function code progressively

Move right to select the displaying parameter

Right-Shift circularly in stopping and running mode. Select
key the parameter modifying digit during the para-
meter modification

-55-
Chapter 4 Operation, Display and Application Examples SD200 User Manual

No. Name Instructions

The key is used to operate on the AC drive in key
Run key
operation mode
This key is used to stop in running state; This key
Stop/Reset is used to reset all control modes in the fault
alarm state..
Keypad F07.01=0 without function
5 button F07.01=1 jog running
zone F07.01=2 shift key to change the display state
S Key F07.01=3 switch between forward and reverse
F07.01=4 clear UP/DOWN setting
F07.01=5 coast to stop
F07.01=6 command source swich

4.3 Display of Keypad

SD200 series Keypad display statussis divided into stopping state parameter, running state
parameter, function code parameter editing state and fault alarm state and so on.

4.3.1 Displayed state of stopping parameter

When the AC drive is in the stopping state, the keypad will display stopping parameters. In
the stopping state,various kinds of parameters can be displayed. Select the parameters to
be displayed or not by F07.04.See the instructions of F07.04 for the detailed definition of
each bit.
In the stopping state, there are 16 stopping parameters can be selected to be displayed or
not. They are: set frequency, bus voltage, input terminals state, output terminals state, PID
given value, PID feedback value, torque set value,AI1,AI2,AI3,HDI,PLC and the current
stage of multi-step speeds, pulse counting value, length value.F07.04can select the
parameter to be displayed or not by bit and press > > button can shift the parameters from
left to right, press butoon "S" (F07.01 = 2) can shift the parameters from right to left.

4.3.2 Displayed state of running parameters

After the AC drive receives valid running commands, the AC drive will enter into the running
state and the keypad will display the running parameters , the "RUN" LED on the keypad is
on, while the "FWD/REV" is determined by the current running direction which is shown as
figure 4-2.
In the running state, there are 29 parameters can selected to be displayed or not. They are:
running frequency, set frequency, bus voltage, output voltage, output torque, PID given
value, PID feedback value, input terminals state, output terminals state, torque set value,
length value, PLC and the current stage of multi-step speeds, pulse counting
value,AI1,AI2,AI3,HDI,percentage of motor overload, percentage of AC drive overload, ramp
given value, Linear speed, AC input current.F07.02 and F07.03 can select the parameter to
be displayed or not by bit and press > > button can shift the parameters from left to right,
press "S" (F7.01 = 2) can shift the parameters from right to left.

-56-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation, Display and Application Examples

4.3.3 Displayed state of fault

If the AC drive detects the fault signal, it will enter into the fault pre-alarm displaying state.
The keypad will display the fault code by flicking. The "TRIP key" LED on the keypad is on,
and the fault reset can be operated by the "STOP/RST key" on the keypad, control termin-
als or communication commands.
4.3.4 Function Code Editor Displays Status
In the state of stopping, running or fault, press "PRG" to enter into editing state(if there is a
password, see F07.00).The editing state is displayed on two classes of menu, and the
order is: function code group/function code number > function code parameter, press
"ENT" into the displayed state of function parameter. On this state, you can press "ENT" to
save the parameters or press "PRG " to retreat.

4.4 Keypad Operation

Operate the AC drive via operations panel. See the detailed structure description of
function code in the brief diagram of function codes.
4.4.1 How to modify the function codes of the inverter
The AC drive has three-level menus, they are:
1. Group number of function code(first-level menu)
2.Tab of function code(second-level menu)
3.Set value of function code(third-level menu)
Operation procedure on the operation panel:

PRG PRG return

50.00 F00 level 1 menu
Display parameter
interface

ENT
PRG return

F00.03 F00.04 level 2 menu

PRG return
ENT

50.00 ENT (modify storage) level 3 menu

Press / modify parameters

Note:
Press both the "PRG" and the "ENT" key to return to level2 menu from the level3 menu. The
difference is: pressing "ENT" will save the set parameters into the control panel, and then
return to the level2 menu with shifting to the next function code automatically; while pressing
"PRG" will directly return to the level 2 menu without saving the parameters, and keep
staying at the current function code.

-57-
Chapter 4 Operation, Display and Application Examples SD200 User Manual

In Level 3 menu, if the parameter has no blinking digit, it means that the parameter cannot
be modified. This may be because:
a. Such a function code is only readable, such as, AC drive model, actually detected
parameter and running record parameter;
b. Such a function code cannot be modified in the running state and can only be
changed to stop.
Example: Set function code F0C.02 from 10.00Hz to 15Hhz.
PRG ENT

50.00 F00 F0C F0C.00 F0C.02

PRG ENT

PRG ENT

F0C F0C.03 15.00 10.00 10.00

Figure 4-3 Modifying parameters diagram

4.4.2 Password Setting

Sd200 series AC drive provide password protection function to users. Set F07.00 to gain
the password and the password protection becomes valid instantly after quitting from the
function code editing state. Press "PRG" again to the function code editing
state,“0.0.0.0.0”will be displayed. Unless using the correct password, the operators cannot
enter it.
Set F07.00 to 0 to cancel password protection function.
The password protection becomes effective instantly after retreating form the function code
editing state. Press "PRG" again to the function code editing state, “0.0.0.0.0”will be
displayed. Unless using the correct password, the operators cannot enter it.

PRG ENT

50.00 F00 F07 F07.00

PRG ENT

PRG ENT

F07 F07.01 X.X.X.X.X 0.0.0.0.0

Figure 4-4 Password setting diagram
4.4.3 How to watch the AC drive state through function codes
SD200 series AC drive provide groupA02 as the sate inspection group. Users can enter
into A02 directly to watch the state. Operations procedure as follows:
PRG ENT

50.00 F00 A02 A02.00

PRG

PRG ENT ENT

A02 A02.06 1400 A02.05
Figure 4-5 Motor speed diagram

-58-
 Chapter 5
Function Parameter Table

5.1 Chapter of This Content

This chapter lists and describes the function parameters.

-59-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

5.2 Function Parameter Table

The function parameters of SD200 series AC drive have been divided into 18 groups(F00-
F0F and A01-A03) according to the function. Each function group contains certain function
codes applying3-level menus. For example, "F08.08" means the eighth function code in the
F8 group function, F0F group is factory Reserved, and users are forbidden to access these
parameters.
For the convenience of function codes setting, the function group number corresponds to
the first level menu, the function code corresponds to the level 2 menu and the function
code corresponds to the level 3 menu.
1. Below is the instruction of the function lists:
The first line"Function code":codes of function parameter group and parameters;
The second line"Name":full name of function parameters;
The third line"Setting range":effective setting value of the function parameters;
The fourth line"Default value":the original factory values of the function parameter;
The fifth line"Modify":the modifying character of function codes(the parameters can
be modified or not and the modifying conditions), below is the instruction:
“○”: means the set value of the parameter can be modified on stop and running state;
“◎”: means the set value of the parameter can not be modified on the running state;
“●”: means the value of the parameter is the real detection value which can not be
modified.
2. "Parameter radix" is decimal(DEC), if the parameter is expressed by hex, then the
parameter is separated from each other when editing. The setting range of the certain bits
are0-F(hex).
3."The default value" means the function parameter will restore to the default value during
default parameters restoring. But the detected parameter or recorded value won't be
restored.
4. For a better parameter protection, the AC drive provides password protection to the
parameters. After setting the password(set F07.00 to any non-zero number),the system will
come into the state of password verification firstly after the user press "PRG" to come into
the function code editing state .And then “0.0.0.0.0”will be displayed. Unless the user input
right password, they cannot enter into the system. For the factory setting parameter zone, it
needs correct factory password(remind that the users cannot modify the factory parameters
by themselves, otherwise, if the parameter setting is incorrect, damage to the AC drive may
occur).If the password protection is unlocked, the user can modify the password freely and
the AC drive will work as the last setting one. When F07.00 is set to 0,the password can be
canceled. If F07.00 is not 0 during powering on, then the parameter is protected by the
password. When modify the parameters by serial communication the function of the
password follows the above rules, too.

-60-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Group F00 Basic Function Group
0: V/F control
F00.00 Motor 1 control mode 1 ◎
1: Vector control 0 mode
0: Keypad run command channel(LED is OFF)
1: Terminal command channel / Keypad STOP
disabled(LED is ON)
2: Terminal command channel / Keypad STOP
Run command enable(LED is ON)
F00.01 3:Communication command / Keypad 0 ○
channel
STOP disabled(LED is flashes)
4:Communication command / Keypad
STOP enabled(LED is flashes)

0: MODBUS Communication channel

Communication run 1: CAN Communication channel
F00.02 command channel 2: Profibus-DP communication channel 0 ○
selection Note:
1,2 means to extension, need to insert the card
F00.03 Max output frequency F00.04~600.00Hz 50.00Hz ◎
F00.04 Upper limit frequency F00.05~F00.03(Maximum frequency) 50.00Hz ◎
0.00Hz~F00.04(Operating frequency upper
F00.05 Lower limit frequency limit) 0.00Hz ◎

0: Keypad digital setting

1: Keypad potentiometer setting
2: Analog AI1 setting
3: Analog AI2 setting
4: Analog AI3 setting
5: High-speed pulse HDI1 setting
6: Simple PLC program setting
A frequency 7: Multi-speed running setting
F00.06 0 ○
command 8: PID control setting
9: MODBUS Communication setting
10: CAN Communication setting
11: Profibus-DP communication setting
Note:
10,11 means to extension function, need to
insert the card

0: Keypad digital setting

1: Keypad potentiometer setting
2: Analog AI1 setting
3: Analog AI2 setting
4: Analog AI3 setting
B frequency 5: High-speed pulse HDI1 setting
F00.07 6: Simple PLC program setting 3 ○
command
7: Multi-speed running setting
8: PID control setting
9: MODBUS Communication setting
10: CAN Communication setting
11: Profibus-DP communication setting

-61-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Note:
B frequency
F00.07 10,11 means to extension function, need to 3 ○
command insert the card
B frequency 0: Maximum output frequency
F00.08 0 ○
command reference 1: A frequency command
B frequency maximum
F00.09 0.0~100.0% 100.0% ○
output frequency
0: A
1: B
Combination of the 2: A+B
F00.10 3: A-B 0 ○
setting codes
4: MAX(A,B)
5: MIN(A,B)

Keypad setting
F00.11 0.00 Hz~F00.03(Max. frequency) 50.00Hz ○
frequency
Model de-
F00.12 Acc-time 1 0.0~6000.0s pendent ○

Model de-
F00.13 Dec-time 1 0.0~6000.0s pendent
○

0: Runs at the default direction

F00.14 Running direction 1: Runs at the reverse direction 0 ○
2: Forbid to run in reverse direction

Carrier frequency Model de-

F00.15 2.0~16.0kHz pendent ○
setting
0: Forward and reverse can be tracked
Speed track 1: Fixed forward track
F00.16 0 ◎
direction setting 2: Fixed reverse track
0: No operation
Motor parameter 1: Rotation autotuning
F00.17 0 ◎
autotuning 2: Static autotuning

0: No operation
Function restore 1: Restore the default value
F00.18 0 ◎
parameter 2: Cancel the fault record

Group F01 Startup and stop Control

0: Start-up directly
F01.00 Start mode 1: Start-up after DC braking 0 ◎
2: Start-up after Speed tracking
Starting frequency
F01.01 0.00~10.00Hz 0.50Hz ◎
of direct start
Retention time of the
F01.02 0.0~100.0s 0.0s ◎
starting frequency
The braking current
F01.03 0.0~150.0% 0.0% ◎
before starting

-62-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
The braking time
F01.04 0.0~100.0s 0.0s ◎
before starting
0: Linear type
F01.05 ACC/DEC selection 1: S-curve type 0 ◎

F01.06 S curve start ratio 0.0~50.0%(Acc/Dec time) 30.0% ◎

F01.07 S curve end ratio 0.0~50.0%(Acc/Dec time) 30.0% ◎
0: Decelerate to stop
F01.08 Stop Mode 0 ○
1: Coast to stop
Starting frequency
F01.09 of DC braking
0.00~F00.03(Max. frequency) 0.00Hz ○

Waiting time of
F01.10 DC braking 0.00~100.0s 0.05s ○

Stopping DC
F01.11 braking current 0.0~150.0% 0.0% ○

Stopping DC
F01.12 braking time 0.0~100.0s 0.0s ○

Dead time of
F01.13 0.0~6000.0s 0.0s ○
FWD/REV rotation
F01.14 Stopping frequency 0.00~100.00Hz 0.50Hz ○
F01.15 Reserved Reserved 0 ●
F01.16 Reserved Reserved 0 ●
The protection of 0: Invalid operation command on terminal
F01.17 0 ○
theelectric terminals 1: valid operation command on terminal
Select restart 0: prohibit restart
F01.18 after power failure 0 ○
1: allow restart
F01.19 Restart waiting time 0.0~6000.0s(F01.18 equal to1is valid) 1.0s ○
F01.20 Reserved Reserved 0 ●
Action if running 0: Operating frequency lower limit)
F01.21 frequency<lower limit 1: Stop(close PWM output) 0 ◎
frequency(valid>0) 2: Zero speed operation

F01.22 Reserve

Group F02 Motor 1 Parameter Group

0: G type(Constant torque/ overloaded type)
F02.00 Load Type 0 ◎
1: P type(Variable torque/ lightload type)
0: Ordinary asynchronous motor (with low-
frequency compensation)
F02.01 Motor type 1 0 ◎
1: AC drive motor (without low frequency
compensation)

-63-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Rated power of Model de-
F02.02 0.1~1000.0kW pendent ◎
motor 1
Rated voltage of Model de-
F02.03 0~1200V pendent ◎
motor 1
Rated current of Model de-
F02.04 0.8~6000.0A pendent ◎
motor 1
Rated frequency
F02.05 0.01Hz~F00.03(Maximum) 50.00Hz ○
of motor 1
Rated speed of Model de-
F02.06 1~36000rpm ○
motor1 pendent

Stator resistance Model de-

F02.07 0.001~65.535Ω ○
of motor 1 pendent
rotor resistance Model de-
F02.08 0.001~65.535Ω ○
of motor 1 pendent

leakage inductance Model de-

F02.09 0.1~6553.5mH pendent ○
of motor 1
Mutual inductance Model de-
F02.10 0.1~6553.5mH pendent ○
of motor 1
Non-load current Model de-
F02.11 0.1~6553.5A pendent ○
of motor 1
F02.12
Reserved 0 0 ●
~24
Motor 1 overload 0: Protection is not valid
F02.25 1 ◎
protection selection 1: Protection is valid
Motor 1 overload
F02.26 50.0~120.0% 100.0% ○
protection coefficient
Group F04 V / F Control Group

0: Straight line V / F curve

1: Multi-dots V / F curve
Motor 1V / F 2: 1.3th power low torque V/F curve
F04.00 3: 1.7th power low torque V/F curve 0 ◎
curve setting
4: 2.0th power low torque V/F curve
5: Customized V/F(V/F separation)

Torque boost 0.0%(automatic torque boost)

F04.01 0.1%~20.0%(Manual torque boost) 0.0% ○
of motor 1
Torque boost 0.0%~50.0%
F04.02 (Relative motor 1 rated frequency) 20.0% ○
close of motor 1
V/F frequency 1
F04.03 0.00Hz~F04.05 0.00Hz ○
of motor 1
V/F Voltage 1 0.0%~100.0%(motor1 rated voltage)
F04.04 00.0% ○
of motor 1

-64-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
V/F frequency 2
F04.05 F04.03~F04.07 0.00Hz ○
of motor 1
V/F Voltage 2 0.0%~100.0%(motor1 rated voltage)
F04.06 00.0% ○
of motor 1
V/F frequency 3 F04.05~F02.02
F04.07 (motor1 rated frequency) 0.00Hz ○
of motor 1
V/F Voltage 3 0.0%~100.0%(motor1 rated voltage)
F04.08 00.0% ○
of motor 1
V/F slip compensation
F04.09 0.0~200.0% 100.0% ○
on gain of motor 1
Vibration control
F04.10 factor at low 0~30 2 ○
frequency of motor 1
Vibration control
F04.11 factor at high 0~30 2
frequency of motor 1
Vibration control 0.00Hz~F00.03(max. frequency)
F04.12 30.00Hz ○
threshold of motor 1

0: Straight V / F curve
1: Multi-point V / F curve
2: 1.3 thpower decreasing torque V/F curve
F04.13 Motor 2 V/F curve setting 3: 1.7 th power decreasing torque V/F curve 0 ◎
4: 2.0 th power decreasing torque V/F curve
5: Custom V / F (V / F separation)

0.0%: automatic torque boost;

F04.14 Torque boost of motor 2 0.0% ○
0.1%~20.0%
Torque boost 0.0%~50.0%
F04.15 (relative to motor rated frequency) 20.0% ○
close of motor 2
F04.16 V/F frequency 1 of motor 2 0.00Hz~F04.18 0.00Hz ○
F04.17 V/F voltage 1 of motor 2 0.0%~100.0%(motor 2 rated voltage) 00.0% ○
F04.18 V/F frequency 2 of motor 2 F04.16~F04.20 00.00Hz ○
F04.19 V/F voltage 2 of motor 2 0.0%~100.0%(motor 2 rated voltage) 00.0% ○
F04.20 V/F frequency 3 of motor 2 F04.18~F0D.06(motor 2 rated frequency) 00.00Hz ○
F04.21 V/F voltage 3 of motor 2 0.0%~100.0(motor 2 rated voltage) 00.0% ○
V/F slip compensation
F04.22 0.0~200.0% 100% ○
gain of motor 2
Vibration control factor at
F04.23 0~30 2 ○
low frequency of motor 2
Vibration control factor at
F04.24 0~30 2 ○
high frequency of motor 2
Vibration control 0.00Hz~F00.03(max. frequency)
F04.25 30.00Hz ○
threshold of motor 2

-65-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0: No operation
F04.26 Energy-saving operation 1: Automatic energy-saving operation 0 ◎

0: Keypad: the output voltage is determined

by F04.28
1: AI1 setting voltage
2: AI2 setting voltage
3: AI3 setting voltage
4: HDI1 setting voltage
5: Multi-setp setting voltage
(setting value is determined by F0B set
F04.27 Voltage setting of parameters of multi-speed ) 0 ○
6: PID setting voltage
7: MODBUS communication setting voltage
8: CAN communication setting voltage
9: Profibus-DP Communication setting
voltage
Note: 8,9 means to extension, it need to
insert the card

F04.28 Keypad setting voltage 0.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○

F04.29 Voltage increasing time 0.0~6000.0s 5.0s ○
F04.30 Voltage decreasing time 0.0~6000.0s 5.0s ○
F04.32~100.0%
F04.31 Maximum output voltage ( the rated voltage of the motor) 100.0% ◎

0.0%~F04.31
F04.32 Minimum output voltage ( the rated voltage of the motor) 0.0% ◎

0: Invalid
F04.33 AVR function selection 1 ○
1: Valid
F04.34 Reserved 0 0 ●
Group F05 Input Terminal Group
0: High pulse input ( see F05.29 ~ F05.34)
F05.00 HDI1 input selection 0 ◎
1: Digital inputs ( see F05.08)
0: No function
1: Forward rotation operation
DI1 terminals 2: Reverse rotation operation
F05.01 1 ◎
function selection 3: Three-wire control operation
4: Forward Jogging
5: Reverse Jogging
6: Coast to stop
DI2 terminals 7: Fault reset
F05.02 8: Operation Pause 4 ◎
function selection
9: External fault input
10: Increase frequency setting (UP)
11: Decrease frequency setting (DOWN)
12: Frequency setting clear
DI3 terminals 13: Shift between A setting and B setting
F05.03 7 ◎
function selection 14: Shift between combination setting and
A setting

-66-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
15: Shift between combination setting and
B setting
16: Multi-step speed terminal 1
DI5 terminals 17: Multi-step speed terminal 2
F05.05 18: Multi-step speed terminal 3 0 ◎
function selection
19: Multi-step speed terminal 4
20: Multi-step speed pause
21: DEC/ACC time 1
22: DEC/ACC time 2
23: Simple PLC stop reset
24: Simple PLC pause
25: PID control pause
26: Traverse pause (stop at the current
DI6 terminals
F05.06 frequency) 0 ◎
function selection 27: Traverse reset (return to the center
(extension frequency)
card function) 28: Counter reset
29: Torque control disabling
30: DEC/ACC disabling
31: Counter trigging
32: Length reset
33: Cancel the frequency change setting
DI7 terminals temporarily
F05.07 0 ◎
function selection 34: DC brake
(extension 35: Shift the motor 1 into motor 2
card function) 36: Shift the command to the keypad
37: Shift the command to the terminal1
38: Shift the command to the terminal 2
39: Shift the command to the communication 1
40: Shift the command to the communication 2
41: Model dependent
42: PID Parameters Switching
HDI1 terminal 43: External terminal stop(equal to keypad
F05.08 STOP) 0 ◎
function selection
44: PID second digital given switching terminal
45: External fault input 2
46: Length counter input terminals
47~63: RESERVE

Polarity selection of
F05.09 0x00~0xFF 0x00 ○
the input terminals
F05.10 ON-OFF filter time 0.000~1.000s 0.010s ○
0: Virtual terminal disabled
1: MODBUS communication virtual terminal
Virtual terminals enabled
F05.11 2: CAN communication virtual terminal is valid 0 ○
setting
3: Profibus-DP communication virtual terminal
is valid
0: 2-wire control 1
Terminals control 1: 2-wire control 2
F05.12 0 ◎
running mode 2: 3-wire control 1
3: 3-wire control 2
Switch-on delay
F05.13 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI1 terminal
Switch-off delay
F05.14 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI1 terminal

-67-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Switch-on delay
F05.15 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI2 terminal
Switch-off delay
F05.16 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI2 terminal
Switch-on delay
F05.17 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI3 terminal
Switch-off delay
F05.18 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI3 terminal
Switch-on delay
F05.19 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI4 terminal
Switch-off delay
F05.20 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI4 terminal
Switch-on delay
F05.21 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI5 terminal
Switch-off delay
F05.22 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI5 terminal
Switch-on delay
F05.23 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI6 terminal
Switch-off delay
F05.24 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI6 terminal
Switch-on delay
F05.25 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI7 terminal
Switch-off delay
F05.26 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
of DI7 terminal
Switch-on delay 0.000~50.000s(only F05.00=1 enable)
F05.27 0.000s ○
of HDI1 terminal
Switch-off delay 0.000~50.000s(only F05.00=1 enable)
F05.28 0.000s ○
of HDI1 terminal
0: Frequency setting input
Hdi high-speed pulse 1: Counter input
F05.29 0 ◎
input function selection 2: Length counting input
Lower limit 0.00
F05.30 0.00KHz~F05.32 ○
frequency of Hdi1 KHz
Corresponding setting
F05.31 of lower limit frequency -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
of HDI1
Upper limit 50.00
F05.32 F05.30~50.00KHz ○
frequency of HDI 1 KHz
Corresponding setting
F05.33 of upper limit frequency -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○
of HDI1
HDI1 frequency
F05.34 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○
input filter time

-68-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
F05.35 Reserved 0 0.010s ●
Group F06 Output Terminal Group
0: Open collector pole high speed pulse
output( See F06.16 for detailed infor-
mation of the related function)
F06.00 HDO1 output 0 ◎
1: Open collector pole output(See F06.02
for detailed information of the related
function)
0: Invalid
1: In operation
2: Forward rotation operation
F06.01 DO1 output 3: Reverse rotation operation 0 ○
4: Jogging operation
5: AC drive fault
6: Frequency degree test FDT1
7: Frequency degree test FDT2
8: Frequency arrival
9: Zero-speed running
F06.02 HDO1 output 10: Upper limit frequency arrival 0 ○
11: Lower limit frequency arrival
12: Ready for operation
13: Pre-Magnetizing
14: Overload pre-alarming
15: Underload per-alarming
16: Completion of Simple PLC stage
Relay T1 output 17: Completion of Simple PLC Circle
F06.03 1 ○
18: Setting count value arrival
19: Defined count value arrival
20: External fault valid
21: Length arrival
22: Running time arrival
23: MODBUS communications virtual
terminal output
F06.04 Relay T2 output 24: AC drive is sleeping 5 ○
25: PROFIBUS communication virtual
terminals output
26: Any frequency 1 arrival
27: Any frequency 2 arrival;
28~30: Reserved
0x00~0x0F:
F06.05 Polarity of output BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0 0x00 ○
terminals T2 T1 HDO1 DO1
F06.06 DO1 switch-on delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
F06.07 DO1 switch- off delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
F06.08 HDO1 switch-on delay time 0.000~50.000s(only F06.00=1 enable) 0.000s ○
F06.09 HDO1 switch- off delay time 0.000~50.000s(onlyF06.00=1 enable) 0.000s ○
F06.10 T1 switch-on delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
F06.11 T1 switch-off delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
F06.12 T2 switch-on delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○
Relay T2 switch-off
F06.13 delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

-69-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0: Running frequency
1: Set frequency
2: Ramp reference frequency
F06.14 AO1 output 3: Running rotation speed 0 ○
4: Output current (relative to the rated
current of AC drive)
5: Output current (relative to the rated
current of the motor)
6: Output voltage
7: Output torque
8: Set torque value
F06.15 AO2 output 9: Output torque 0 ○
10: Analog A I1 input value
11: Analog A I2 input value
12: Analog A I3 input value
13: High speed pulse HDI1 input value
14: PID reference
15: PID feedback
16: Modbus communications reference 1
F06.16 HDO1 output 17: Modbus communications reference 2 0 ○
18: Bus voltage
19: Profibus-DP communication given 1
20: Profibus-DP communication given 2

F06.17 Lower output limit of AO1 -100.0%~F06.19 0.0% ○

Corresponding AO1
F06.18 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V ○
output of lower limit
F06.19 Upper output limit of AO1 F06.17~100.0% 100.0% ○
The corresponding AO1
F06.20 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ○
output of upper limit
F06.21 AO1 output filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○
F06.22 Lower output limit of AO2 -100.0%~F06.24 0.0% ○
Corresponding AO2
F06.23 0.00V~10.00V 0.0% ○
output of lower limit
F06.24 Upper output limit of AO2 F06.22~100.0% 100.0% ○
The corresponding AO2
F06.25 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ○
output of upper limit
F06.26 AO2 output filter time 0.000~10.000s 0.000s ○
F06.27 Lower output limit of HDO1 0.0%~F06.29 0.0% ○
Corresponding HDO1
F06.28 0.00~50.00kHz 0.00Hz ○
output of lower limit
F06.29 Upper output limit of HDO1 F06.27~100.0% 100.0% ○
Corresponding HDO1 50.00
F06.30 0.00~50.00kHz ○
output of upper limit kHz
F06.31 HDO1 output filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○
Group F07 HMI Group
F07.00 User’s password 0~65535 0 ○

-70-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0: Without function
1: Jogging
2: Shift the display state by the shifting key
The key of S 3: Shift between forward rotations and reve-
F07.01 0 ◎
function selection rse rotations
4: Clear UP / DOWN settings
5: Coast to stop
6: Command source switch
0x0000~0xFFFF
BIT0: Running frequency(Hz ON)
BIT1: Setting frequency(Hz flickering)
BIT2: Bus voltage(V ON)
BIT3: Output voltage(V ON)
BIT4: Output current(A ON)
BIT5: Runing rotation speed（ rpm ON)
BIT6: Output power(% ON)
F07.02 Parameters state 1 BIT7: Output torque(% ON) 0x0031 ○
BIT8: PID reference (% ON)
BIT9: PID feedback(% ON)
BIT10: Input state
BIT11: Output terminal state
BIT12: Torque setting value(% ON)
BIT13: Pulse count value
BIT14: Length value
BIT15: PLC current segment number

0x0000~0x1FFF
BIT0:The current number of multistage speed
BIT1: AI1(V on)
BIT2: AI2(V on)
BIT3: AI3(V on)
BIT4: HDI frequency
BIT5: Motor overload precentage(% on)
F07.03 Parameters state 2 BIT6: The inverter overload percentage 0X0000 ○
(% on)
BIT7: Ramp frequency given value(Hz on)
BIT8: Linear speed
BIT9: AC inlet current(A on)
BIT10: Set rotary speed
BIT11: Set linear speed
BIT112: IGBT temperature
BIT113~15: Reserve
0x0000~0xFFFF
BIT0: Set frequency(Hz on, frequency
flicking slowly)
BIT1: Bus voltage(V on)
BIT2: Input terminals state
BIT3: Output terminals state
Parameters for BIT4: PID reference(% flicking)
F07.04 0x03FF ○
stopping state BIT5: Set rotary speed
BIT6: Ttorque refernece(% on)
BIT7: AI1(V on)
BIT8: AI2(V on)
BIT9: AI3(V on)
BIT10: HDI1 frequency

-71-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
BIT11: PLC current stage
BIT12: Set linear speed
Parameters for BIT13: Pulse counters
F07.04 0x03FF ○
stopping state BIT14: Length value
BIT15: IGBT temperature
0.01~20.00
F07.05 Frequency coefficient 1.00 ○
Display frequency=Running frequency ×F07.05
0.1~999.9%
F07.06 Rotation Speed Mechanical rotation speed=60× running 100.0% ○
frequency×F07.06/Motor pole pairs
0.1~999.9%
F07.07 Linear speed coefficient Mechanical rotation speed=60×diapalyed 1.0% ○
running frequency×F07.06/Motor pole pairs
Rectifier bridge ----
F07.08 -20.0~120.0 ●
module temperature
Converter module ----
F07.09 -20.0~120.0 ●
temperature
F07.10 Software version 1.00~655.35 ---- ●
Local accumulative ----
F07.11 0~65535h ●
running time
F07.12 Reserved 0 ---- ●
F07.13 Reserved 0 ---- ●
0: G type Constant torque load ----
F07.14 Load Type ●
1: P type Variable torque load
F07.15 AC drive rated power 0.4~1000.0kW ---- ●
F07.16 AC drive rated voltage 20~1200V ---- ●
F07.17 AC drive rated current 0.1~6000.0A ---- ●

F07.18 Current fault type ---- ●

The 1 times ----

F07.19 ●
before fault type
The 2 times ----
F07.20 Please refer to Chapter 8 8.7 ●
before fault type
Fault Instruction and Solution
The 3 times ----
F07.21 ●
before fault type
The 4 times ----
F07.22 ●
before fault type
The 5 times ----
F07.23 ●
before fault type

Running frequency ----

F07.24 0.00Hz ●
at current fault

-72-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Ramp reference ----
F07.25 0.00Hz ●
frequency at current fault
output voltage ----
F07.26 0V ●
at the current fault
output current ----
F07.27 0.0A ●
at current fault
Bus voltage at ----
F07.28 0.0V ●
current fault
The Max. temperature ----
F07.29 0.0 ●
at current fault
Input terminals state ----
F07.30 0 ●
at current fault
Output terminals state ----
F07.31 0 ●
at current fault
Running frequency ----
F07.32 0.00Hz ●
at previous fault
Ramp reference frequency ----
F07.33 0.00Hz ●
at previous fault
Output voltage ----
F07.34 0V ●
at previous fault
The output current ----
F07.35 0.0A ●
at previous fault
Bus voltage ----
F07.36 0.0V ●
at previous fault
The Max. temperature ----
F07.37 0.0℃ ●
at previous fault
Input terminals state ----
F07.38 0 ●
at previous fault
Output terminals ----
F07.39 0 ●
state at previous fault
Running frequency ----
F07.40 0.0A ●
at previous 2 fault
Ramp reference frequency ----
F07.41 0.0V ●
at previous 2 fault
Output voltage ----
F07.42 0.0℃ ●
at previous 2 faults
Output current ----
F07.43 0 ●
at previous 2 fault
Bus voltage ----
F07.44 0 ●
at previous 2 fault
The Max. temprature ----
F07.45 0.0℃ ●
at previous 2 fault

-73-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Input terminals state ----
F07.46 0 ●
at previous 2 fault
Output terminals state ----
F07.47 0 ●
at previous 2 fault
Group F08 Strengthen Function Groups
Model
F08.00 ACC time2 0.0~6000.0s ○
dependent
Model
F08.01 DEC time2 0.0~6000.0s ○
dependent
Model
F08.02 ACC time3 0.0~6000.0s ○
dependent
Model
F08.03 DEC time3 0.0~6000.0s ○
dependent
Model
F08.04 ACC time4 0.0~6000.0s ○
dependent
Model
F08.05 DEC time4 0.0~6000.0s ○
dependent

F08.06 Jogging frequency 0.00~F00.03(Max. frequency) 5.00Hz ○

Model
F08.07 Jogging ACC time 0.00~6000.0s ○
dependent
Model
F08.08 Jogging DEC time 0.00~6000.0s ○
dependent
F08.09 Fault reset times 0~10 0 ○
Interval time of
F08.10 0.1~100.0s 1.0s ○
automatic fault reset
Frequency decreasing
F08.11 0.00~10.00Hz 0.00Hz ○
ratio of the dropping control
0: Terminal shifting
1: MODBUS Communication shifting
F08.12 Motor shifting 2: CAN Communication shifting 0 ◎
3: Profibus-DP communication switch
Note: 2,3 is function, only valid with card.

FDT1 electrical
F08.13 0.00~F00.03(Max. frequency) 50.00Hz ○
level detection value
FDT1 retention -100.0~100.0%(FDT1 level)
F08.14 5.0% ○
detection value
FDT2 electrical 0.00~F00.03(Max. frequency)
F08.15 50.00Hz ○
level detection
FDT2 retention -100.0~100.0%(FDT2 level)
F08.16 5.0% ○
detection value

-74-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Frequency arrival 0.0~F00.03(Max. frequency)
F08.17 0.00Hz ○
detection value
0: Disable
F08.18 Energy braking enable 1 ○
1: Enable
220V
350.0~2000.0V
(380V)
F08.19 Threshold voltage ○
380V
620.0~2000.0V
(700V)
PWM over 0: Invalid
F08.20 1 ◎
commission selection 1: Valid
0x000~0x1221
LED ones: Frequency control selection
0: ∧/∨keys are valid
1: ∧/∨key are invalid
LED tens: Frequency control selection
0: Only valid when F00.06=0 orF00.07=0
1: Valid for all frequency setting manner
2: Invalid for multi-step when multi-step
F08.21 Keypad data control has the priority 0x0000 ○
LED hundreds: Action selection during stopping
0: Setting is valid
1: Valid during running, cleared after stopping
2: Valid during running, cleared after receiving
the stop command
LED thousands: ∧/∨ keys integral function
0: The integral function is valid
1: The integral function is invalid

Integral ratio
F08.22 0.1~10.0s 1.0s ○
of the keypad∧/∨
0x00~0x221
LED ones: Frequency control selection
0: UP/DOWN terminals setting valid
1: UP/DOWN terminals setting invalid
LED tens: Frequency control selection
0: Only valid when F00.06=0 or F00.07=0
UP/DOWN 1: All frequency means are valid
F08.23 2: When the multi-step are priority, it is invalid 0x000 ○
terminal control
to the multi-step
LED hundreds: Action selection when stop
0: Setting valid
1: Valid in the running, clear after stop
2: Valid in the running, clear after receiving the
stop commands

UP terminals frequency
F08.24 changing ratio 0.01~50.00s 0.50s ○

DOWN terminals
F08.25 frequency changing ratio 0.01~50.00s 0.50s ○

-75-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0x000~0x111
LED ones: Action selection when power off
0: Save when power off
1: Clear when power off
LED tens: Action selection when MODBUS set
Frequency frequency off
F08.26 0: Save when power off 0x000 ○
setting at power loss
1: Clear when power off
LED hundreds: Action selection when other
frequency set frequency off
0: Save when power off
1: Clear when power off

0: Invalid
F08.27 Magnetic flux braking 1~100: The bigger the coefficient, 0 ○
the stronger the braking is)

0: Running frequency
1: Set frequency
2: Bus voltage
3: Output voltage
4: output current
5: Running rotation speed
6: Output power
7: Output torque
8: PID reference
9: PID feedback
10: Input terminals state
11: Output terminals state
12: Torque setting value
13: Pulse counter value
14: Length value
F08.28 Auxiliary Monitoring 15: PLC current stage 1 ○
16: The current number of multi-stage speed
17: AI1 value
18: AI2 value
19: AI3 value
20: HDI1 frequency
21: Motor overload percentage(% on)
22: AC drive overload percentage(% on)
23: Ramp frequency given value(Hz on)
24: Linear speed
25: AC inlet current(A on)
26: set rotary speed
27: set linear speed
28: IGBT temperature

0: No operation；
1: Control panel parameter upload to the
keypad EEPROM；
F08.29 Parameter copy 2: Keypad EEPROM parameter download to 0 ◎
selection the control panel and do not download motor
parameter;
3: Keypad EEPROM parameter download to the
control panel and download motor parameter;

-76-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

IO expansion card 0: Enable

F08.30 0 ○
1: Disable
Power failure under 0: invalid
F08.31 0 ○
voltage decelerate stop 1: valid
Power failure under
F08.32 0~6000.0 s 0.5S ○
voltage decelerate time

Run power failure 200V(3 phase)

F08.33 decelerate cut-off 80~800V ◎
voltage 120V(single phase)
Detection time 1 of
F08.34 arbitrary frequency 0~F00.03 50.00Hz ○
arrival
Detection width 1 of
F08.35 arbitrary frequency 0~100.0%(Max. frequency) 0 ○
arrival
Detection time 2 of
F08.36 arbitrary frequency 0~F00.03 50.00Hz ○
arrival
Detection width 2 of
F08.37 arbitrary frequency 0~100.0%(Max. frequency) 0 ◎
arrival
Jogging selection 0: Enable
F08.38 0 ◎
under running situation 1: Disable
0x000~0xCCC

Unit's digit: Binding operation panel

command to frequency source
0: No binding
1: Keypad digital setting
2: Keypad potentiometer setting
3: Analog AI1 setting
Binding command 4: Analog AI2 setting
F08.39 source to frequency 5: Analog AI3 setting
source 6: High-speed pulse HDI1 setting 0x000 ◎
7: Simple PLC program setting
8: Multi-speed running setting
9: PID control setting
A: MODBUS Communication setting
B: CAN Communication setting
C: Profibus-DP communication setting

Ten's digit:Binding terminal command to

frequency source
0–C same as unit's digit

Hundred's digit (Binding communication

command to frequency source)
0–C, same as unit's digit

-77-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.40 Brake use ratio 0.0%~100.0% 100.0% ◎

Group F09 PID control Group

0: Keypad(F09.01)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: HDI
5: Multi-step speed set
F09.00 PID reference source 0 ○
6: MODBUS communication set
7: CAN communication setting
8: Profibus-DP Communication set
9: Panel potentiometer
Note: 7,8 CAN communication setting need
corresponding extension cards.

F09.01 Keypad PID preset 0~100.0% 50.0% ○

0:AI1
1:AI2
2:AI3
3:HDI
Keypad 4:MODBUS communication set
F09.02 0 ○
feedback source 5:CAN communication setting
6:Profibus-DP communication feedback
Note: 5 ,6 CAN communication setting need
corresponding extension cards.
0: PID output is positive
F09.03 PID output feature 0 ○
1: PID output is negative

F09.04 Proportional gain(Kp) 0.00~100.00 0.50 ○

F09.05 Intergal time(Ti) 0.00~10.00s 0.20s ○
F09.06 Differential time(Td) 0.00~10.00s 0.00s ○
F09.07 Sampling cycle(T) 0.00~10.00s 0.10s ○

F09.08 PID control 0.00~10.00% 0.2% ○

deviation limit
Output upper F09.10~100.0%(max. frequency or voltage)
F09.09 0.0% ○
limit of PID
Output lower -100.0~F09.09 (max. frequency or voltage)
F09.10 100.0% ○
limit of PID
Detection value 0.0~100.0%
F09.11 of feedback offline 0.0% ○
Detection time 0.0~3600.0s
F09.12 of feedback offline 1.0s ○

-78-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0x0000~0x1111
LED ones
0：Keep on integral adjustment when the
frequency achieves the upper and low
limit; the integration shows the change
between the reference and the feedback
unless it reaches the internal integral limit.
When the trend between the reference
and the feedback changes, it needs more
time to offset the impact of continuous
working and the integration will change with
the trend.
1：Stop integral adjustment when the
frequency achieves the upper and low limit. If
the integration keeps stable, and the trend
between the reference and the feedback
changes, the integration will change with the
trend quickly.
F09.13 PID adjustment 0x1100 ○
LED tens
0：The same with setting direction; if the
output of PID adjustment is different from
the current running direction, the internal will
output 0 forcedly.
1：Opposite to the setting direction
LED hundreds
0：PID given value cannot adjust by the
UP/DOWN key.
1：PID given value can adjust by the
UP/DOWN key.
LED thousands
0：When AC drive power off, PID given value
set UP/DOWN by will not save.
1：When AC drive power off, PID given value
set UP/DOWN by will save.

F09.14 Proportional gain 2(Kp2) 0.00~100.00 0.50 ○

F09.15 Integral time(Ti2) 0.00~10.00s 0.2S ○
F09.16 Differential time(Td2) 0.00~10.00s 0.00S ○
0: No switching
PID Parameters
F09.17 1: According to the switching input bias 0 ◎
Switching
2: According terminal switching
Deviation threshold
F09.18 0.0%~100.0% 20% ○
when PID is switching
F09.19 PID Hibernate Frequency 0.00~F00.03(Max Frequency) 0.0 ○
F09.20 PID Hibernate Delay Time 0.0~3600.0s 30.0s ○
F09.21 PID Awaken Value 0.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
PID Awaken ○
F09.22 0.0~60.0s 0.5S
Value delay time
F09.23 PID Preset Value 0.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

-79-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
PID Preset Value
F09.24 0.0~600.0s 0.0s ○
Keeping time
0: the frequency source is given from other
PID initial value given switching to PID, and the initial
F09.25 restarts effective value is invalid. 0 ○
selection 1: the frequency source runs efficiently from
other given handover to PID given.
0.0~100.0%:
PID second
F09.26 Note: through terminal function: 50.0% ○
digital given
44, implement PID given source switch
F09.27 PID range 0~9999 100 ○
PID range decimal 0~3 ○
F09.28 1
number
PID Hibernate 0: Decelerate to stop
F09.29 stop mode 1: Coast to stop 1 ○

F09.30 PID feedback limit 0.0~100.0% 100.0% ○

detection value

F09.31 PID feedback limit 0.0~3600.0s 1.0s ○

detection time
Group F0A Swing Frequency, Fixed Length, Count and Timing
Swing frequency 0.0~100.0%(Setting frequency)
F0A.00 0.0% ○
amplitude
Kick frequency 0.0~100.0%(Swing frequency amplitude)
F0A.01 0.0% ○
amplitude
Rise time of
F0A.02 0.0~3600.0s 0.0s ○
swing frequency
Decline time of
F0A.03 0.0~3600.0s 0.0s ○
swing frequency
F0A.04 Setup length 0~65536m 0m ○
F0A.05 Designed length 0~65536m 0m ●
The number of
F0A.06 1~10000 1 ○
pulses of each rotate
Circumference
F0A.07 0.01~100.00cm 10.00cm ○
of the shaft
F0A.08 Length multiples 0.001~10.000 1.000 ○
F0A.09 Length correction factor 0.001~1.000 1.000 ○
F0A.10 Set count value F0A.11~65535 0 ○
F0A.11 Designated count value 0~F0A.10 0 ○
F0A.12 Running time setting 0~65535min 0 ○
0: invalid
Exact stop mode 1: setting length arrive
F0A.13 0 ○
2: setting count value arrive
3: setting running time arrive
F0A.14 Actual running time 0~65535min 0 ●

-80-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Group F0B Simple PLC and Multi-speed Control Group
0: Stop after running once
F0B.00 Simple PLC running 1: Run at the final value after running once 0 ○
method 2: Cycle running
Simple PLC memory 0: Power loss without memory
F0B.01 selection when in
1: Power loss memory 0 ○
power loss

F0B.02 Multi-step speed 0 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.03 The running time of step 0 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.04 Multi-step speed 1 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.05 The running time of step 1 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.06 Multi-step speed 2 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.07 The running time of step 2 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.08 Multi-step speed 3 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.09 The running time of step 3 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.10 Multi-step speed 4 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.11 The running time of step 4 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.12 Multi-step speed 5 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.13 The running time of step 5 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.14 Multi-step speed 6 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.15 The running time of step 6 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.16 Multi-step speed 7 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.17 The running time of step 7 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.18 Multi-step speed 8 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.19 The running time of step 8 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.20 Multi-step speed 9 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.21 The running time of step 9 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.22 Multi-step speed 10 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.23 The running time of step 10 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.24 Multi-step speed 11 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.25 The running time of step 11 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.26 Multi-step speed 12 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.27 The running time of step 12 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.28 Multi-step speed 13 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.29 The running time of step 13 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

-81-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
F0B.30 Multi-step speed 14 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.31 The running time of step 14 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
F0B.32 Multi-step speed 15 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
F0B.33 The running time of step 15 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○
Simple PLC 0-7 step
F0B.34 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○
ACC/DEC time
Simple PLC 8-15 step
F0B.35 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○
ACC/DEC time
0: Restart from the first stop
1: Continue to run from the stage range
F0B.36 PLC restart frequency 0 ◎
2: Continue to run from the running
frequency

Multi-step time unit 0: S

F0B.37 0 ◎
1: Min
0: Set by F0B.02
1: Keypad digital setting
2: Keypad potentiometer setting
3: Analog AI1 setting
F0B.38 Multi-step speed 0 source 4: Analog AI2 setting 0 ◎
5: Analog AI3 setting
6: High-speed pulse HDI1 setting
7: MODBUS Communication setting

Group F0C Protection Parameters Group

0x00~0x11
LED ones:
0: Input phase loss protection disable
F0C.00 Phase loss protection 1: Input phase loss protection enable 0x11 ◎
LED tens:
0: Input phase loss protection disable
1: Input phase loss protection enable

Frequency decreasing 0: Enable

F0C.01 1: Disable 0 ○
at sudden power loss
Frequency decreasing 10.00
F0C.02 0.00Hz~F00.03/s(Max. frequency) ◎
ratio at sudden power loss Hz/s

-82-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Over-voltage 0: Invalid
F0C.03 1 ○
stall protection 1: Valid
120%
F0C.04 Voltage protection
120~150%(AC drive standard bus voltage) (220V) ○
of over-voltage stall 130%
(380V)
Current limit 0: Disable
F0C.05 1 ◎
action selection 1: Enable
166%(G-type load)
F0C.06 Automatic current limit 50.0~200.0% ○
120%(P-type load)

Frequency decreasing 10.00

F0C.07 0.00~50.00Hz/s ◎
ratio during current limit Hz/s

0x000~0x111
LED ones:
0: Overload pre-alarm of the motor, relative
to the rated current of the motor
1: Overload pre-alarm of the AC drive,
relative to the rated current of the AC drive
LED tens:
F0C.08 Phase loss protection 0: The AC drive continues to work after 0x000 ○
underload pre-alarm
1: The AC drive continues to work after
underload pre-alarm and the AC drive
stops to run after overload fault
LED hundreds:
0: Detection all the time
1: Detection in constant running

G type:150%
Overload pre-alarm
F0C.09 F0C.12~200% ○
detection P type: 120%

Overload pre-alarm
F0C.10 0.1~60.0s 1.0s ○
detection time
0x000~0x111
LED ones:
0: Motor underload pre-alarm, relative to
the motor rated current
1: Motor underload pre-alarm, relative to
the AC drive rated current
Underload pre-alarm LED tens:
F0C.11 0x100 ○
of motor/AC drive 0: AC drive continue running after
overload alarm
1: AC drive stops after underload fault
LED hunreds:
0: Detection all the time
1: Detection in constant running
Underload
F0C.12 0%~F0C.09 30% ○
pre-alarm detection

-83-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Underload
F0C.13 0.1~60.0s 1.0s ○
pre-alarm detection time
0x00~0x11
LED ones:
0: Action under fault undervoltage
Output terminal 1: No action under fault undervoltage
F0C.14 0x00 ○
action during fault LED tens:
0: Action during the automatic reset
1: No action during the automatic reset
0x00~0x11
LED ones:
0: Fixed carrier frequency
1: Carrier frequency automatically adjust as
Carrier frequency
F0C.15 the temperature arises. 0x00 ○
adjustment selection
LED tens:
0: Fixed carrier frequency
1: Carrier frequency is automatically
adjusted when it is overloaded
0: Three-phase modulation
F0C.16 PWM mode 1: Three-phase and two-phase modulation 1 ◎
switching
Low frequency 0: Low frequency filter valid
F0C.17 1: Low frequency filter invalid 1 ◎
filter selection
F0C.18 Reserved 0 0 ●
Group F0D Motor 2 Parameter Group
0: V/F control
F0D.00 Motor type 2 control mode 1 ◎
1: Vector mode 0 control
0: G-type (constant torque load)
F0D.01 Load type 0 ◎
1: P-type (variable torque / light load)
0: Ordinary asynchronous motor
(with low-frequency compensation)
F0D.02 Motor type2 0 ◎
1: Frequency asynchronous motor
(without low frequency compensation)
Model de-
F0D.03 Rated power of motor 2 0.1~1000.0kW ◎
pendent

Model de-
F0D.04 Rated voltage of motor 2 0~1200V ◎
pendent

Model de-
F0D.05 Rated current of motor 2 0.8~6000.0A ◎
pendent

Model de-
F0D.06 Rated frequency of motor 2 0.01Hz~F00.03(max. frequency) ◎
pendent

Rated speed of motor 2 1~36000rpm Model de-

F0D.07 ◎
pendent

Model de-
F0D.08 Stator resistor of motor2 0.001~65.535Ω ◎
pendent

-84-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Model de-
F0D.09 Rotor resistor of motor 2 0.001~65.535Ω pendent ◎

Leakage inductance Model de-

F0D.10 0.1~6553.5mH pendent ◎
of motor 2
Mutual inductance Model de-
F0D.11 0.1~6553.5mH pendent ◎
of motor 2
Model de-
F0D.12 Non-load current of motor 2 0.1~6553.5A ◎
pendent

F0D.13
Reserved 0 0 ●
~25
Motor 2 overload 0: Invalid
F0D.26 1 ◎
protection selection 1: Valid
Motor 2 overload
F0D.27 50.0%~120.0% 100.0% ◎
protection factor
Group F0E Serial Communication Function Group

Local communication 0~247 (0 is communication address)

F0E.00 1 ○
address
0: 1200BPS
1: 2400BPS
2: 4800BPS
F0E.01 Communication baud ratio 3: 9600BPS 4 ○
4: 19200BPS
5: 38400BPS
0: No check(N, 8, 1)for RTU
1: Even check(E, 8, 1)for RTU
2: Odd check(O ,8, 1)for RTU
F0E.02 Digital bit checkout 3: No check(N, 8, 2)for RTU 1 ○
4: Even check(E, 8, 2)for RTU
5: Odd check(O, 8, 2)for RTU

F0E.03 Answer delay 0~200ms 5 ○

Fault time of 0.0: Invalid;
F0E.04 0.0s ○
communication overtime 0.1~60.0s
0: Alarm and stop freely
1: No alarm and continue to run
Transmission 2: No alarm and stop according to the stop
F0E.05 mode (Only under the communication control) 0 ○
fault proccessing
3: No alarm and stop according to the stop
mode (Under all control modes)

Communication 0: Write with response

F0E.06 0 ○
processing action selection 1: Write without response

F0E.07 Interval time send 10ms-5000ms 200ms ○

by Master
0: Standard RTU mode
F0E.08 MODBUS Communication 1: Mode 1 0 ○
mode selection 2: Mode 2

-85-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Group A01 A1 Curve Setting Function Group
A01.00 Lower limit of AI 1 0.00V~ A01.02 0.00V ○
Corresponding setting
A01.01 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
of the lower limit of AI 1
A01.02 Upper limit of AI 1 A01.00~10.00VA01.02 10.00V ○
Corresponding setting
A01.03 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○
of the upper limit of AI 1
A01.04 Ai1 input filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○
A01.05 Lower limit of AI2 -10.00V~ A01.09 -10.00V ○
Corresponding setting
A01.06 -100.0%~100.0% -100.0% ○
of the lower limit of AI2
A01.07 Upper limit of AI2 A01.09~10.00V 10.00V ○
Corresponding setting
A01.08 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○
of the upper limit of AI2
A01.09 Middle value of AI2 A01.05~A01.07 0.00V ○
Corresponding
A01.10 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
middle setting ofAI2
A01.11 AI2 input filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○
A01.12 Lower limit of AI3 -10.00V~A01.14 -10.00V ○
Corresponding setting
A01.13 -100.0%~100.0% -100.0% ○
of the lower limit of AI3
A01.14 Upper limit of AI3 A01.12~10.00V 10.00V ○
Corresponding setting
A01.15 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○
of the upper limit of AI3
A01.16 Middle value of AI3 A01.12~A01.14 0.00V ○
Corresponding
A01.17 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
middle setting ofAI3
A01.18 AI3 input filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○
A01.19 Keypad analog filter time 0.000~10.000s 0.050s ○
Ones:
AI1 lower than minimum input
setting selection 1-0.0%
Tens:
AI lower than minimum AI2 lower than minimum input
A01.20 0x000 ◎
input setting selection setting selection(As above)
Hundreds:
AI3 lower than minimum input
setting selection(As above)

-86-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0: No action
1: AI1 channel correction
2: AI2 channel correction
A01.21 AI,AO corrective active 3: AI3 channel correction
selection 4: A01 channel correction 0 ◎
5: A02 channel correction

A01.22 AI1display voltage1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎

A01.23 AI1 measured voltage1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.24 AI1display voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.25 AI1measured voltage2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.26 AI2 display voltage1 -10.000~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.27 AI2 measured voltage1 -10.000~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.28 AI2 display voltage 2 -10.000~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.29 AI2 measured voltage 2 -10.000~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.30 AI3 display voltage 1 -10.000~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.31 AI3 measured voltage 1 -10.000~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.32 AI3 display voltage 2 -10.000~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.33 AI3 measured voltage 2 -10.000~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.34 AO1 display voltage 1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.35 AO1 measured voltage 1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.36 AO1 display voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.37 AO1 measured voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.38 AO2 display voltage1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.39 AO2 measured voltage1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.40 AO2 display voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.41 AO2 measured voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
Group A02 Monitoring Function Group
A02.00 Setting frequency 0.00Hz~F00.03 0.00Hz ●
A02.01 Output frequency 0.00Hz~F00.03 0.00Hz ●
A02.02 Ramp reference frequency 0.00Hz~F00.03 0.00Hz ●
A02.03 Output voltage 0~1200V 0V ●
A02.04 Output current 0.0~5000.0A 0.0A ●
A02.05 Motor speed 0~65535rpm 0rpm ●
A02.06 Reserved 0 0 ●
A02.07 Reserved 0 0 ●

-87-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
A02.08 Output power -300.0~300.0%(the rated current of the motor) 0.0% ●
A02.09 Output torque -250.0~250.0%(the rated current of the motor) 0.0% ●
A02.10 Evaluated motor frequency 0.00~F00.03 0.00Hz ●
A02.11 DC bus voltage 0.0~2000.0V 0V ●
A02.12 Digital input terminals state 0x00~0xFF 0x00 ●
A02.13 Digital output terminals state 0x0~0xF 0x00 ●
A02.14 Digital adjustment 0.00Hz~F00.03 0.00Hz ●

A02.15 RESERVED ●

A02.16 Linear speed 0~65535 0 ●

A02.17 Length value 0~65535 0 ●
A02.18 Counting value 0~65535 0 ●
A02.19 AI1 input voltage 0.00~10.00V 0.00V ●
A02.20 AI2 input voltage -10.00~10.00V 0.00V ●
A02.21 AI3 input voltage -10.00~10.00V 0.00V ●
A02.22 HDI1input frequency 0.00~50.00kHz 0.00kHz ●
A02.23 PID reference -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ●
A02.24 PID feedback -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ●
A02.25 PID output -100.0~100.00% 0.00% ●
A02.26 Power factor of the motor -1.00~1.00 0.0 ●
A02.27 Current running time 0~65535min 0m ●
Simple PLC and the current
A02.28 0~15 0 ○
step of the multi-step speed
-300.0%~300.0%
A02.29 ASR controller output 0.0% ●
(the rated current of the motor)
A02.30 AO1 Output 0-10.00V 0 ●
A02.31 AO2 Output 0-10.00V 0 ●
A02.32 AC current 0.0~5000.0A 0.0A ●
A02.33 Output torque -3000.0Nm~3000.0Nm 0.0Nm ●
Count value of 0~100 (100 report E.OPL1 fault)
A02.34 0 ●
motor overload
Copy keypad EEPROM
A02.35 0 0 ●
software version
A02.36 Reserved 0 0 ●
1: Current motor 1
A02.37 Current motor seletion 1 ●
2: Current motor 2

-88-
Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
A03 Group DP Parameters
A03.00 PPO type 0~4 2 ◎
A03.01 DP slave address 1~127 1 ◎
0: no operation
A03.02 PZD3 Write 1: Communication setting frequency 0 ○
(0~Fmax (Unit~0.01Hz))
2: PID Given value (-1000~1000,1000
A03.03 PZD4 Write corresponding 100.0%) 0 ○
3: PID feedback (-1000~1000,1000
corresponding 100.0%)
4: Torque setting value (-3000~3000，1000
A03.04 PZD5 Write 0 ○
corresponding 100.0% motor rated current）
5: Forward up limit frequency setting value
(0~Fmax(unit: 0.01Hz))
A03.05 PZD6 Write 6: Reverse up limit frequency setting valu 0 ○
(0~Fmax(unit: 0.01Hz))
7: Electric torque up limit torque(0~3000,1000
A03.06 PZD7 Write correspondingto 100.0% inverter current) 0 ○
8: Braking torque up limit torque(0~3000,1000
corresponding to100.0% motor rated current)
A03.07 PZD8 Write 9: Particular control demand character: 0 ○
Bit0~1: =00: motor1 =01: motor2
=10: motor3 =11: motor4
Bit2: =1: torque control =0: speed control
A03.08 PZD9 Write 10: Virtual input terminal command, range: 0 ○
0x000~0x1FF
11: Virtual output terminal command,range:
A03.09 PZD10 Write 0x00~0x0F 0 ○
12: Voltage setting value(V/F separation
purpose)(0~1000,1000 corresponding
A03.10 PZD11 Write 100.0% motor rated voltage) 0 ○
13: AO output setting value 1(-1000~1000,
1000 corresponding 100.0%)
PZD12 Write 14: AO output setting value 2(-1000~1000,
A03.11 0 ○
1000 corresponding 100.0%)
15: Reserve
16: Factory barcode 1
17: Factory barcode 2 0 ○
18: Factory barcode 3
19: Factory barcode 4
20: Factory barcode 5 0 ○
21: Factory barcode 6
0: running frequency(Hz on)
A03.14 PZD3 Read 1: setting frequency(Hz blinking) 0 ○
2: Bus voltage(V on)
3: output voltage (V on)
A03.15 PZD4 Read 4: output current (A on) 0 ○
5: running rotational speed (rpm on)
6: output frequency(%on)
A03.16 PZD5 Read 7: output torque (%on) 0 ○
8: PID given value(%on)
9: PID feedback value (%on)
A03.17 PZD6 Read 10: input terminal status 0 ○

-89-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 5 Function Parameter Table

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0: No-operation
1: Setting frequency(Hz flash)
A03.18 PZD7 Read 2: Bus voltage(V ON) 0 ○
3: Output voltage (V ON)
4: Output current (A ON)
5: Running rotation speed (rpm ON)
6: Output power (% ON)
A03.19 PZD8 Read 7: Output torque (% ON) 0 ○
8: PID reference(% Flash)
9: PID feedback(% ON)
10: Input terminal state
11: Output terminal state
12: Torque setting value(% ON)
A03.20 PZD9 Read 13: Pulse count value 0 ○
14: Length value
15: PLC current segment number
16: Current segment number of multiple speed
17: AI1 value (V ON)
A03.21 PZD10 Read 18: AI2 value (V ON) 0 ○
19: AI3 value (V ON)
20: HDI frequency
21: Motor overload percentage(% ON)
22: Inverter overload percentage(% ON)
23: Ramp frequency given value (Hz ON)
A03.22 PZD11 Read 24: Linear speed 0 ○
25: AC input current
26: Setting rotation speed
27: Setting linear speed
28: Converter module temperature
A03.23 PZD12 Read 29: Reserve 0 ○
30: Running frequency at current fault
31: Ramp reference frequency at current fault
32: Output voltage at current fault
33: Output current at current fault
34: Bus voltage at current fault
35: The max. temperature at current fault
36: Input terminal state at current fault
37: Output terminal state at current fault
38: Reserve
39: Reserve
40: Manufacturer Barcode 1
41: Manufacturer Barcode 2
42: Manufacturer Barcode 3
43: Manufacturer Barcode 4
44: Manufacturer Barcode 5
45: Manufacturer Barcode 6

-90-
 Chapter 6
Parameter Description

The Content of This Chapter

This chapter lists the function code table, and give a brief description of the function code
table.

-91-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Group F00 Basic Function Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F00.00 Motor 1 control mode 0~1 1 ◎

0: V/F Control Mode:

It suitable for the less load demanding occasion, for example, fans and pumps load. It
canbe used for Single one AC drive to drive several motors or the applications in which
the motor parameter auto-tuning function cannot operated, or other cases.
1: Vector control 0 mode
Low frequency, high torque output, strong load adaptability, one AC drive is used to
drive multiple motors; need to obtain exact motor parameters by auto-tuning function.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Run command
F00.01 channel 0~4 0 ○

Select the run control command of the AC drive channel. The control command of the
AC drive includes: Start-up, stop, forward, reverse, jogging and fault reset.

0: Keypad running command channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” light off)

Carry out command control by RUN, STOP / RST on the keypadl. Set the multi-functionl
key S set to FWD / REV shifting function (F07.01 = 3)to change the running direction;
press RUN and STOP / RST simultaneously in running state to make the AC drive coast to
stop.

1: Terminal running command channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” ON)

Carry out the running command control by the forward rotation, reverse rotation and
forward jogging and reverse jogging of the multi-function terminals, the Keypad STOP
invalid.

2: Terminal running command channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” is ON)

Carry out the running command control by the forward rotation, reverse rotation and
forward jogging and reverse jogging of the multi-function terminals, the Keypad STOP
valid.

3: Communication run command channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” is FLASH)

The running command is controlled by the upper monitor via communication , the Keypad
STOP invalid.

4: Communication running command channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” is FLASH)

The running command is controlled by the upper monitor via communication, the Keypad
STOP valid.

-92-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Communication run
F00.02 command channel 0~2 0 ○
selection

0: MODBUS communication channel

1: CAN communication channel

2: Profibus-DP communication channel

Note: 1,2 is extension functions which need corresponding extension card.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F00.03 Max output frequency F00.04~600.00Hz 50.00Hz ◎

This parameter is used to set the maximum output frequency of the AC drive. User should
pay attention to this parameter because it is the foundation of the frequency setting and
the speed of acceleration and deceleration.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F00.04 Upper limit frequency F00.05~F00.3 (max. frequency) 50.00Hz ◎

The upper limit of the running frequency is the upper limit of the output frequency of the AC
drive which is lower than or equal to the maximum frequency.

The AC drive runs at the upper limit frequency if the set frequency is higher than the upper
limit one.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0.00Hz~F00.04 (Operating frequency upper
F00.05 Lower limit frequency limit) 0.00Hz ◎

The lower limit of the running is that of the ouput frequency of the AC drive.

when setting frequency is lower than the lower limit frequency, which is decided by F01.21.
Note:Max. output frequency≥Upper limit frequency≥Lower limit frequency.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F00.06 A frequency command 0~11 0 ○

F00.07 A frequency command 0~11 3 ○

-93-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

0: Keypad
Modify the value F00.11(set the frequency by keypad)to modify the frequency by the keypad.

1: Keypad potentiometer setting

Set the value of the specified frequency source is set by an analog potentiometer knob on the
Keypad, the user operates the potentiometer knob to set and modify the value of the
frequency source.

2: Analog AI1 setting

3: Analog AI2 setting

4: Analog AI3 setting

Set the frequency source by analog input terminals. SD200 AC drive provide 3 ways analog
input terminals AI1 / AI2 and AI3 as the standard configuration, of which Ai1 is the
voltage/current option e (0 ~ 10V / 0 ~ 20mA) which can be shifted by jumpers; while AI2 / Ai3
are voltage input (-10V ~ + 10V).
Note: When analog AI1 select 0 ~ 20mA input, the corresponding voltage of 20mA is10V.
100.0% of the analog input setting corresponds to the maximum output frequency (F00.03) in
forward direction and -100.0% corresponds to the maximumoutput frequency in reverse
direction(funvtion code F00.03) the details function code refer to group A01 parameters.

5: High-speed pulse HDI1 setting

The frequency is set by high-speed pulse terminals. SD200 series AC drive provide 1 high
speed pulse input as the standard configuration. The pulse frequency range is 0.00 ~
50.00kHz. 100% of the high speed pulse input setting corresponds to the maximum output
frequency in forward direction (F00.03) and - 100.0% corresponds to the maximum output
frequency in reverse direction (F00.03).
Note: The pulse setting can only be input by enter multi-function terminal HDI1. Set F05.00
(HDI1 input selection) to high-speed pulse input, F05.29 (HDI1 high-speed pulse input
selection) to frequency setting input.”

6: Smple PLC program setting

The AC drive runs at simple PLC program mode when F00.06 = 6 or F00.07 = 6. Set F0B
(simple PLC and multi-steo speed control) to select the running frequency, running direction,
ACC/DEC time and the keeping time of corresponding stage. See the function description of
F0B for detailed information.

7: Multi-step speed running setting

The AC drive runs at multi-step speed mode when F00.06 = 7 or F00.07 = 7, set F05 to
select the current running stage, and set F0B to select the current running frequency.

Note: The multi-step speed has the priority when F00.06 or F00.07 does not equal to 6 or 7,
but the setting stage can only be the 1 ~ 15 stage. The setting stage is 0 ~15 if F00.06 or
F00.07 equal to 7.

-94-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

8: PID control setting

The running mode of the AC drive is process PID control when F00.06 = 8 or F00.07 = 8.
The running frequency of the AC drive is the value after PID effect. See F09 for the
detailed information of the given source, given value, feedback source of the PID.

9: MODBUS communication setting.

The frequency is set by the MODBUS communications.See F0E for detailed information.

10: CAN communication setting.

The frequency is set by CAN communication.

11: Profibus-DP communication setting.

Assigned frequency source setting value is decided by Profibus-DP communication.

Note:10,11 is extension functions which need corresponding extension card.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

B frequency 0:Maximum output frequency

F00.08 command reference 1:A frequency command 0 ○

0: Maximum output frequency, 100% of B frequency setting corresponds to the maximum

output frequency.

1: A frequency command, 100% of B frequency setting o corresponds to the maximum

output frequency. Select this setting and F00.10 if it needs to adjusts on the base of A
frequency command.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

B frequency maximum
F00.09 output frequency 0.0~100.0% 100.0% ○

This parameter is the gain coefficient of the source B frequency running results.B
frequency source = B frequency source command (percentage) × B frequency command
reference object×B frequency source gain coefficient when the user selects B frequency
source as the auxiliary frequency source, it can set the auxiliary frequency source affects
to set frequency by this parameter setting.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Combination of the
F00.10 setting codes 0~5 0 ○

0: A, The current frequency setting is A Frequency source.

-95-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

1: B, The current frequency setting is B Frequency source.

2: A+B，The current frequency setting is A Frequency source+ B Frequency source.

3: A-B，The current frequency setting is A Frequency source - B Frequency source.

4: MAX(A,B),Current frequency setting is the bigger one between A Frequency source B

Frequency source.

5: MIN(A,B), Current frequency setting is the smaller one between A Frequency source
and B Frequency source.

Note: The combination manner can be shifted by F05 group ( terminal function).

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Keypad setting
F00.11 frequency 0.00 Hz~F00.03(Max. frequency) 50.00Hz ○

When A and B frequency commands are selected as "keypad settings", the value of the
function code is the original setting one of the frequency data of the AC drive .

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Model de-
F00.12 Acc-time 1 0.0~6000.0s pendent ○

Model de-
F00.13 Dec-time 1 0.0~6000.0s pendent ○

ACC time mean the time needed if the AC drive speeds up from 0Hz to the Max.
One(F00.03) .

DEC time mean the time needed if the AC drive speeds down from the Max. output to 0Hz
frequency (F00.03).

SD200 series define four groups of ACC/DEC time which can be selected by F08. The
factor default ACC/DEC time of the AC drive is the first group.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F00.14 Running direction 0~2 0 ○

0: Runs at the default direction, the AC drive runs in the forward direction, FWD / REV LED
indicator is OFF.

1: Runs at the reverse direction. the AC runs in the reverse direction, FWD / REV LED
indicator is ON.

-96-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Modify the function code to shift the rotation direction of the motor. This effect equals to
the shifting the rotation direction by adjusting either two of the motor lines (U, V, W).
The motor rotation direction can be changed by the S key on the keypad. Refer to
parameter F07.01.

2: Forbid to run in reverse direction: It can be used in some special cases if the reverse
running is disabled.

Note: When the function parameter come back to the default value, the motor’s running
direction will come back to the default state, too. In some cases it should be used with
caution after commissioning if the change of rotation direction is disabled.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Carrier frequency Model de-

F00.15 setting 2.0~10.0kHz pendent ○

When A and B frequency commands are selected as "keypad settings", the value of the
function code is the original setting one of the frequency data of the AC drive .

The relationship table of the

Carrier Electromagnetic Leakage Cooling motor type and carrier frequency
frequency noise Current Degree
Model Carrier frequency Default

2kHz big big big

0.7~11KW 5KHz

5kHz 15~30KW 4KHz

37~75KW 3KHz
12kHz small small small
More than 75KW 2KHz

The advantages of high carrier frequency: ideal current waveform, little current harmonic
wave and motor noise.

The disadvantages of high carrier frequency: increasing the switch loss, increasing AC
drive temperature and the impact to the output capacity. The AC drive needs to derate on
high carrier frequency. At the same time, the leakage and electrical magnetic interference
will increase. Apply low carrier frequency will cause unstable running, torque decreasing
and surge.

The the manufacturers has set a reasonal carrier frequency when the AC drive is in factory.
In general, users do not need to changethe parameters.

When users use over the default carrier frequency, it need to derating , each additional 1k
carrier frequency, it need to derate 10% .

-97-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Speed track
F00.16 direction setting 0 ~2 0 ◎

0: Forward and reverse can be tracked

1: Fixed forward track

2: Fixed reverse track

F00.16 setting speed track start (F01.00=2) direction judge. In running, motor
forward/reverse direction revolve , the setting is 0. When the motor is determined to only
forward rotation , it can be set to 1. When the motor is determined to only reverse,it can be
set to 2.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Motor parameter
F00.17 autotuning 0~2 0 ◎

0: No operation

1: Rotation autotuning: Comprehensive motor parameter autotune. It is recommended to

use rotation autotuning when high control accuracy is needed.

2: Static autotuning: It is suitable in the cases when the motor can not de-couple from the
load. The antotuning for the motor parameter will impact the control accuracy.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Function restore
F00.18 parameter 0~2 0 ◎

0: No operation

1: Restore the default value

2: Cancel the fault record

Note:Restoring to the default value will cancel the user password, please use this function
with caution.

-98-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group F01 Start-up and Stop Control Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F01.00 Start mode 0~2 0 ◎

0: Star-up directly: start from the starting frequency F01.01.

1: Star-up after DC braking: start the motor from the starting frequency after DC braking
(set the parameter F01.03 and F01.04). and then start the motor at the starting frequency.
For closed-loop vector control, the first pre-excitation generated stator flux, and then start
the motor running, it can effectively enhance the output and dynamic response on startup.

2: Start-up after speed tracing : the AC drive automatically track the speed and direction of
the motor for rotating the motor in smooth start. Apply to certain high inertia loads with
rotation of the occasion when the starter motor rotor, SD200 AC drive hardware detection
method using motor speed track, has a wide range of speed track (0 ~ 600Hz), without
providing the advantages of other parameters.

Note: When select speed tracking start, the control board T/A, S/B terminal jumper
settings set as follows:
T S

A B

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Starting frequency
F01.01 of direct start 0.00~10.00Hz 0.50Hz ◎

Setting frequency of direct start-up means the original frequency during the AC drive
starting. See F01.02 for detailed information.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Retention time of the

F01.02 starting frequency 0.0~100.0s 0.0s ◎

Set a proper starting frequency to increase the torque of the AC drive during starting.
During the retention time of the starting frequency, the output frequency of the AC drive is
the starting frequency. And then, the AC drive will run from the starting frequency to the set
frequency. If the set frequency is lower than the starting frequency,the AC drive will stop
running and keep in the stand-by state. The starting frequency is not limited the lower
frequency.

-99-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

frequency f

fmax

f1

time
t1 f1 set by F01.01
t1 set by F01.02

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

The braking current

F01.03 before starting 0.0~150.0% 0.0% ◎

The braking time

F01.04 before starting 0.0~100.0s 0.0s ◎

The AC drive will carry out DC braking at the braking current set before starting and it will
speed up after the DC braking time.If the DC braking is set to o, the DC braking current is
carried out according to the preset DC braking current . After setting the DC braking is
invalid.

The stronger the braking current, the bigger of the braking power. The DC braking current
before starting means the percentage of the rated current of the AC drive.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F01.05 ACC/DEC selection 0~1 0 ◎

F01.06 S curve start ratio 0.0~50.0%(Acc/Dec time) 30.0% ◎

F01.07 S curve end ratio 0.0~50.0%(Acc/Dec time) 30.0% ◎

F01.05 set starting and running frequency mode selection .

0: line type; the output frequency by line increment or decrement.

1: S curve type; output frequency by increases or decreases according of S curve.

S curve is generally used to relatively flat occasion for the start and stop the process ,
such as elevators, conveyor belt.

-100-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

f(Output frequency) f(Output frequency)

fmax fmax

time time
t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2

Instruction: t1is the start segment ratio of the S curve,

t2 is the end segment ratio of the S curve.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F01.08 Stop Mode 0~1 0 ○

0: Decelerate to stop: after the stop command because valid, the AC drive decelerates to
decrease the output frequency, during the set time. When the frequency decrease to 0Hz ,
the AC drive stop.

1: Coast to stop: after the stop command becomes invalid, the AC drive ceases the output
immediately. And the load coasts to stop at the mechanical inertia.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Starting frequency
F01.09 of DC braking 0.00~F00.03(Max. frequency) 0.00Hz ○

Waiting time of
F01.10 DC braking 0.00~100.00 0.05s ○

Stopping DC
F01.11 braking current 0.0~150.0% 0.0% ○

Stopping DC
F01.12 braking time 0.0~100.0s 0.0s ○

The starting frequency of stop braking: the AC drive will carry on stop DC braking when the
frequency is arrived during the procedure of decelerating to stop.

The waiting time of stop braking: before the stop DC braking, the AC drive will close output
and begin to carry on the DC braking after the waiting time. This function is used to avoid
the overcurrent fault caused by DC braking when the speed is too high.

Stop DC braking current: the DC brake added. The stronger the current, the bigger the DC
braking effect.

The braking time of stop braking: the retention time of DC brake. If the time is 0, the DC
brake is invalid. The AC drive will stop at the set deceleration time.

-101-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Dead time of
F01.13 FWD/REV rotation 0.0~6000.0s 0.0s ○

During the procedure of switching FWD/REV rotation, set the threshold by F01.14, which is
as the table below:
Output
frequency f

Forward
Shift after the starting frequency
Starting
frequency Shift after the zero frequency
t

REV
Dead time

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F01.14 Stopping frequency 0.00~100.00Hz 0.50Hz ○

F01.14 set the AC drive stop speed threshold. Below this value the AC drive to stop
running.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F01.15 Reserved Reserved 0 ●

F01.16 Reserved Reserved 0 ●

This parameter is Reserved.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

The protection of 0: Invalid operation command on terminal

F01.17 theelectric terminals 1: valid operation command on terminal 0 ○

When the running commands are controlled by the terminal, the system will detect the state
of the running terminal during powering on.

0: The terminal running is invalid when powering on. Even the running command is
detected to be valid during/powering on, the AC drive won’t run and the system keeps in
the protection state until the running command is canceled and enabled again.

-102-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

1: The terminal running command is valid when powering on. If the running command is
detected to be valid during powering, the system will start the AC drive automatically after
the initialization.

Note: This function should be selected with cautions, or serious result may follow.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Select restart 0： prohibit restart
F01.18 after power failure 1： allow restart 0 ○

This function can eable the AC drive start or not after the power off and then power on.

0: Prohibit restart

1: Allow restart, if the starting need is met, the AC drive will run automatically after waiting
for the time defined by F01.19.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F01.19 Restart waiting time 0.0~6000.0s(F01.18 equal to1is valid) 1.0s ○

Valid when F01.18, the function determines the waiting time before the automatic running
of the AC drive when powering off and then powering on.
Output
frequency(f)

t1=F01.19
time

Running

Running power failure power on

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F01.20 Reserved Reserved 0 ●

This parameter is Reserved.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Action if running
F01.21 frequency<lower limit 0~2 0 ◎
frequency(valid>0)

-103-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

0: Running at lower limit frequency.

1: Stop(Close PWM output)

2: Zero speed operation

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F01.22 Reserved

Group F02 Motor 1 Parameter Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F02.00 Load Type 0~1 0 ◎

0: G type(Constant torque /heavyload type load)

1: P type(Variable torque / lightload type load)

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F02.01 Motor type 1 0~1 0 ◎

0: General asynchronous motor without independent cooling fans, at low frequencies the
cooling effect is poor, it will make the appropriate compensation when AC drive under
thermal protection.

1: The frequency variable asynchronous motor have independent cooling fan and don’t
need low frequency compensation.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Rated power of Model de-

F02.02 motor 1 0.1~1000.0kW pendent ◎

Rated voltage of Model de-

F02.03 motor 1 0~1200V
pendent ◎

Rated current of Model de-

F02.04 motor 1 0.8~6000.0A pendent ◎

-104-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Rated frequency
F02.05 of motor 1 0.01Hz~F00.03（ Maximum） 50.00Hz ○

Rated speed of Model de-

F02.06 motor1 1~36000rpm pendent ○

The function parameter is used to set the asynchronous motor nameplate parameters.
Regardless use the V/F control or vector control, in order to ensure the performance of
control, it must be in accordance with the asynchronous motor nameplate parameter and
set to the correct F02.02~F02.06 value. In addition, please be noted that, if the power of
motor and AC drive standard fitness machine, the distribution power gap is too large (over
two files of the power), that the control performance of the AC drive will significantly
decreased as well.SD200 provides parameter auto-tuning function. Accurate parameter
auto-tuning depends on proper setting of the motor nameplate parameters.

Note:Reset the motor rated power (F02.02), you can initialize F02.0~F02.11 motor
parameters.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Stator resistance Model de-

F02.07 of motor 1 0.001~65.535Ω pendent ○

rotor resistance Model de-

F02.08 of motor 1 0.001~65.535Ω ○
pendent
leakage inductance Model de-
F02.09 of motor 1 0.1~6553.5mH pendent ○

Mutual inductance Model de-

F02.10 of motor 1 0.1~6553.5mH pendent ○

Non-load current Model de-

F02.11 of motor 1 0.1~6553.5A pendent ○

F02.07 ~ F02.11 is asynchronous motor 1 identification parameters, these parameters are

not showed in general motor nameplate, they need to obtain from AC drive’s auto-tuning on
motor parameters. Dynamic auto-tuning can acquire F02.07~F02.15 all the parameters,
static auto-tuning only get 3 parameters of F02.07~F02.09 ,the other parameters remain
the factory default value.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F02.12
~24 Reserved 0 0 ●

F02.12-24 parameters are reserved.

-105-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Motor 1 overload 0:valid

F02.25 protection selection 1 ◎
1:invalid
Motor 1 overload
F02.26 protection coefficient 50.0~120.0% 100.0% ○

F02.25 set effectiveness of motor 1 overload protection.

Motor 1 overload protection curve is inverse curves, motor 1 electrical

overload=F02.26xmotor 1 rated current. When the actual load current <110%xMotor 1 ov-
erload current, overload protection invalid; when the actual load current=116%xMotor 1
overload current for 1 hour then report overload fault; when the actual load current =
200%x motor 1 overload current for 1 min reports overload protection. Overload factor is
larger, the report contained over shorter time to failure, overload curves shown in the
following figure:

T
1h

1min
current(A)

116% 200%

-106-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group F04 V/F Control Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

Motor 1V / F
F04.00 curve setting 0~5 0 ◎

0: Straight line V/F curve

1: Multi-dots V/F curve

2: 1.3th power low torque V/F curve

3: 1.7th power low torque V/F curve

4: 2.0th power low torque V/F curve

5: Customized V/F(V/F separation)

The various type of curves as shown in below, Vb in the below picture is the motor rated
voltage and fb is the motor rated frequency.

Output voltage
Vb
1.3th power low torque V/F curve
Straight type 1.7th power low torque V/F curve
2.0th power low torque V/F curve

Square type

fb

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Torque boost 0.0%(automatic torque boost)

F04.01 of motor 1 0.1%~20.0%(Manual torque boost) 0.0% ○

Torque boost 0.0%~50.0%

F04.02 close of motor 1 (Relative motor 1 rated frequency) 20.0% ○

Output voltage
Vb

Input voltage

f fb

-107-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Torque boost to the output voltage for the features of low frequency torque. F04.01 is for the
percentage of the rated motor voltage Vb. In practical application, torque boost should be
selected according to the load. The bigger the load is, the bigger the boost is. Too bigger
torque is inappropriate because the motor will run with over-magnetic,and the current of the
AC drive will increase to raise the temperature of the AC drive and decrease the efficiency.

When the torque boost is set to 0.0%, the AC drive is automatic torque boost, and AC drive
interior will according to the motor stator resistance value and the actual running current to
make compensation for stator resistance voltage.

F04.02 define a manual cut-off frequency of torque boost is relative to percentage of the
motor rated frequency fb. Torque boost threshold: under the threshold, the torque boost is
valid, but over the threshold, the torque boost is invalid.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

V/F frequency 1
F04.03 of motor 1 0.00Hz~F04.05 0.00Hz ○

V/F Voltage 1 0.0%~100.0%(motor1 rated voltage)

F04.04 of motor 1 00.0% ○

V/F frequency 2
F04.05 of motor 1 F04.03~F04.07 0.00Hz ○

V/F Voltage 2 0.0%~100.0%(motor1 rated voltage)

F04.06 of motor 1 00.0% ○

V/F frequency 3 F04.05~F02.02(motor1 rated frequency)

F04.07 of motor 1 0.00Hz ○

V/F Voltage 3 0.0%~100.0%(motor1 rated voltage)

F04.08 of motor 1 00.0% ○

When F04.00 =1(multi-point V/F curve), the user can set V/F curve through
F04.03~F04.08.V/F is generally according to the load of the motor.

Note:V1<V2<V3, f1<f2<f3.Too high low frequency voltage will heat the motor excessively or
cause damage. The AC drive may install when overcurrent of overcurrent protection.

Output voltage
100%Vb

V3

V2

Output
V1 frequency(Hz)

f1 f2 f3 fb

-108-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

V/F slip compensation

F04.09 on gain of motor 1 0.0~200.0% 100.0% ○

The function code is used to compensate the change of the rotation speed caused by load
during compensation V/F control to improve the rigidity of the motor.It can be set to rated
slip frequency of the motor which is counted as below:

△f = f b-n×p/60

Note: fb is the rated frequency of the motor, its function code is F02.05. n is the rated
rotating speed of the motor and its function code is F02.06. p is the pole pair of the motor.
100% corresponds to the rated slip frequency △ f.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Vibration control
F04.10 factor at low 0~30 2 ○
frequency of motor 1
Vibration control
F04.11 factor at high 0~30 2
frequency of motor 1

Vibration control 0.00Hz~F00.03(max. frequency)

F04.12 threshold of motor 1 30.00Hz ○

In V/F control mode, current fluctuation may occur to the motor at some frequency,
especially the motor with big power. The motor can not run stably or overcurrent may
occur. These phenomena can be canceled by adjusting this parameter.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F04.13 Motor 2 V/F curve setting 0.0~200.0% 0 ◎

0: Straight line V/F curve

1: Multiple-dots V/F curve

2: 1.3th power low torque V/F curve

3: 1.7th power low torque V/F curve

4: 2.0th power low torque V/F curve

5: Customized V / F (V/F Separation)

-109-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

0.0%(automatic torque boost)

F04.14 Torque boost of motor 2 0.1%~20.0% 0.0% ○

Torque boost 0.0%~50.0%

F04.15 close of motor 2 (relative to motor rated frequency) 20.0% ○

F04.16 V/F frequency 1 of motor 2 0.00Hz~F04.18 0.00Hz ○

F04.17 V/F voltage 1 of motor 2 0.0%~100.0%(motor 2 rated voltage) 00.0% ○

F04.18 V/F frequency 2 of motor 2 F04.16~F04.20 00.00Hz ○

F04.19 V/F voltage 2 of motor 2 0.0%~100.0%(motor 2 rated voltage) 00.0% ○

F04.20 V/F frequency 3 of motor 2 F04.18~F0D.06(motor 2 rated frequency) 00.00Hz ○

F04.21 V/F voltage 3 of motor 2 0.0%~100.0%(motor 2 rated voltage) 00.0% ○

V/F slip compensation
F04.22 gain of motor 2 0.0~200.0% 100% ○

Vibration control factor at

F04.23 low frequency of motor 2 0~30 2 ○

Vibration control factor at

F04.24 high frequency of motor 2 0~30 2 ○

Vibration control 0.00Hz~F00.03(max. frequency)

F04.25 threshold of motor 2 30.00Hz ○

The above function of the Motor 2 have similar meanings with motor 1 parameters, it can
refer to the parameters of the motor 1 described.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F04.26 Energy-saving operation 0~1 0 ◎

0: No operation

1: Automatic energy-saving operation

Motor will automatically adjust the output voltage to save energy when light loads.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F04.27 Voltage setting 0~9 0 ○

F04.27 voltage setting channel selection definition table

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

Keypad: the output voltage is

0 1 AI1 setting voltage
determined by F04.28

-110-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

2 AI2 setting voltage 3 AI3 setting voltage

Multi-setp setting voltage(setting
4 HDI1 setting voltage 5 value is determined by F0B set of
parameters of multi-speed )
MODBUS communication
6 PID setting voltage 7 setting voltage
CAN communication Profibus-DP communication
8 setting voltage 9 setting voltage

Note: 100.0% corresponds to the rated voltage of the motor. 8,9 is the extension function,
used with card.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F04.28 Keypad setting voltage 0.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○

The function code is the voltage displaying when the voltage is set through keypad
(F04.27=0).

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F04.29 Voltage increasing time 0.0~6000.0s 5.0s ○

F04.30 Voltage decreasing time 0.0~6000.0s 5.0s ○

Voltage increasing time is the time when the AC drive accelerates from the output
maximum voltage.

Voltage decreasing time is the time when the AC drive decelerates from the output
maximum voltage to the output minimum voltage.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
F04.32~100.0%
F04.31 Maximum output voltage ( the rated voltage of the motor) 100.0% ◎

0.0%~F04.31
F04.32 Minimum output voltage ( the rated voltage of the motor) 0.0% ◎

Set the upper and lower limit of the output voltage.

The setting range of F04.31 : F04.32~100.0% (the rated voltage of the motor).

-111-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

F04.31
Vmax
V
t1=F04.29 t2=F04.30

F04.32
Vmin t1 t2
time

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F04.33 AVR function selection 0~1 1 ○

0: Invalid

1: Valid in the whole process

This parameter sets the AVR function, when the AVR is enable, when the input voltage of
the power grid changes, the AC drive will automatically adjust to maintain constant output
voltage.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F04.34 Reserved 0 0 ●

This parameter is Reserved.

-112-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group F05 Input Terminal Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F05.00 HDI1 input selection 0~1 0 ◎

0: HDI1is high pulse input (see F05.29 ~ F05.34)

1: HDI1 is digital input (see F05.08)

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

DI1 terminals
F05.01 function selection 1 ◎

DI2 terminals
F05.02 function selection 4 ◎

DI3 terminals
F05.03 function selection 7 ◎

DI4 terminals
F05.04 function selection 0 ◎
0~63
DI5 terminals
F05.05 function selection 0 ◎

DI6 terminals function

F05.06 selection(extension 0 ◎
card function)
DI7 terminals function
F05.07 selection(extension 0 ◎
card function)
HDI1 terminal
F05.08 function selection 0 ◎

Input Terminal Function Selection Definition Table

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

0 No function 1 Forward rotation operation

2 Reverse rotation operation 3 3-wire control operation

4 Forward jogging 5 Reverse jogging

6 Coast to stop 7 Fault reset

8 Operation Pause 9 External fault input

10 Increase frequency setting(UP) 11 Decrese frequency setting(DOWN)

12 frequency setting Clear 13 shift between A setting and B setting

shift between combination Shift between combination
14 setting and A 15 setting and B setting

16 Multi-step speed terminal 1 17 Multi-step speed terminal 2

18 Multi-step speed terminal 3 19 Multi-step speed terminal 4

20 Multi-step speed pause 21 Dec /Acc time 1

22 Dec/ Acc time2 23 Simple PLC stop reset

-113-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

24 Simple PLC pause 25 PID control pause

Traverse pause(stop at the Traverse reset(return to the
26 current freuqency) 27 center frequency)

28 Counter reset 29 timer reset

30 Dec/Acc disabling 31 counter input

Cancel the frequency change
32 Length reset 33 setting temporarily

34 DC brake 35 shift the motor 1 to motor 2

36 Shift the command to the keypad 37 Shift the command to the terminal 1
Shift the command to Shift the Command to the
38 the terminal 2 39 communication1
Shift the Command to
40 the communication2 41 Reserved

External terminal stop

42 PID Parameters Switching 43 （ equal to keypad STOP）
PID second digital given
44 45 External fault input 2
switching terminal
46 Length counter input 47~63 RESERVE

Terminal Function Explained in Details

Setting Function Instruction
Value
Even if there is a signal input， the AC drive remain the same.
0 No function Unused terminal was set to NO Function to prevent the wrong
action.
Forward rotation
1 operation Through the external terminal to control the AC drive forward and
Reverse rotation reverse running.
2 operation

3-wire control Through this terminal to determine the AC drive is three line
3 operation control mode. The detailed instructions please refer to F05.12
Three wire control mode function code.

4 Forward jogging
Jogging frequency, jogging acceleration and deceleration time d
please refer to F08.06, F08.07 and F08.08.
5 Reverse jogging

AC drive without output, the motor is not controlled by the AC

6 Coast to stop drive. For the large inertia load and no requirements for the
stopping time adopts this method.

Same function with the Keypad on the STOP/RESET reset and

7 Fault reset used to achieve remote fault reset.
The AC drive deceleration stop, but all the operating parameters
are memory state. Such as, PLC parameters, the frequency of
8 Operation Pause the swing parameters and PID parameters. This signal disappe-
ars, the AC drive resume to the previous state before the stop.

External fault input When the external fault signal sent to the AC drive, the AC drive
9 display fault and shut down.

-114-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Setting Function Instruction

Value
By the external terminal given frequency to modify the frequency
increase and decrease instruction.
Increase frequency
10 setting(UP)
K1
UP Terminal

AC drive
K2
DOWN Terminal

Decrese frequency K3 UP/DOWN

11 setting(DOWN) Clear terminal
COM

The frequency increase or decrease setting clear terminal can

frequency clear the frequency value of the auxiliary channel of the
12 setting Clear UP/DOWN in the AC drive, so that the given frequency can be
recovered to a given frequency only by the primary frequency
command channel.

shift between A This function can achieve the shift between A frequency given
13 setting and B setting and B frequency given channel.
shift between
combination This function can achieve the shift between the combination of
14 the F00.10 settings set channel and A frequency given channel.
setting and A

Shift between
combination This function can achieve the shift between the combination of
15 the F00.10 settings set channel and B frequency given channel.
setting and B setting

Multi-step Through the combination of the four terminals digital state can
16 speed terminal 1 achieve 16 speed settings.
Multi-step Note: Multi segment speed terminal 1 is low-order, multi segment
17 speed terminal 2 speed terminal 4 is high-order.

Multi-step
18 speed terminal 3 MS terminal 4 MS terminal 3 MS terminal 2 MS terminal 1

Multi-step BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0

19 speed terminal 4
Multi-step Shielding multi segment speed select terminal function, so that
20 speed pause the set value is maintained in the current state.
Through the combination of these two terminals to select 4
groups of acceleration and deceleration time:
21 Dec /Acc time 1 Correspondence
Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Dec/Acc time selection parameters
OFF OFF Dec and Acc time 1 F00.12/F00.13

OFF ON Dec and Acc time 2 F08.00/F08.01

22 Dec/ Acc time2 ON OFF Dec and Acc time 3 F08.02/F08.03

ON ON Dec and Acc time 4 F08.04/F08.05

Simple PLC stop reset Restart the simple PLC process, clear the previous PLC state
23 memory information.
PLC suspend during the process, and keep running at current
24 Simple PLC pause speed, after the revocation of the function, the simple PLC
continue to run.

PID control pause PID temporary failure, the AC drive maintain the current
25 frequency output.

-115-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Setting Function Instruction

Value
Traverse pause(stop AC drive suspended in the current output, after the revocation
26 at the current of the function that continue to operate at the current frequency.
freuqency)
Traverse reset(return to
27 the center frequency) AC drive setting frequency come back to center frequency.

28 Counter reset The counter state is cleared.

29 timer reset the actual running time is cleared.

To ensure that the AC drive is not affected by external signals

30 Dec/Acc disabling (except for the shutdown command), to maintain the current
output frequency.

31 counter input counter pulse input terminal

32 Length reset The length of the meter is cleared.

Cancel the frequency When the terminal close, the frequency value of the UP/DOWN
33 change setting can be cleared, and the fixed frequency can be recovered to a
temporarily certain frequency. When the terminal is off， it return to the
frequency value after increase or decrease setting.
When command is effective, the AC drive immediately starts the
34 DC brake DC braking.
shift the motor 1 When this function terminal is effective, motor 1 control switch
35 to motor 2 to the motor 2 control.
when the function terminal is effective, the operation command
Shift the command channel is forced to switch to the Keypad operation command
36 to the keypad channel, when function terminal is disabled, the command
channel is restore to original state.

When the function terminal is effective, the operation command

channel is forced to switch to the terminal operation command
Shift the command to channel 1 (Similar to the F00.01=1 function). When the function
37 the terminal 1 terminal is disabled, the command channel is operated to restore
to original state.

When the function terminal is effective, the operation command

channel is forced to switch to the terminal operation command
Shift the command channel 2 (Similar to the F00.01=2 function). When the function
38 to the terminal 2 terminal is disabled, the command channel is operated to restore
to original state.

When the function terminal is effective, the operation command

channel is forced to switch to the terminal operation command
Shift the Command to channel 1 (Similar to the F00.01=3 function).When the function
39 the communication1 terminal is disabled, the command channel is operated to restore
to original state.

When the function terminal is effective, the operation command

channel is forced to switch to the terminal operation command
Shift the Command to channel 2 (Similar to the F00.01=4 function). When the function
40 the communication2 terminal is disabled, the command channel is operated to restore
to original state.

41 Reserved ------
PID Parameters When the terminalis valid, use Group 2 PID;
42 Switching When the terminal is invalid, use Group 1 PID parameters.
External
43 terminal stop External stop signal equal to keypad STOP

-116-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Setting Function Instruction

Value

44 PID second digital For switching PID second digital given

given switch

External fault input 2 When the external fault signal sent to the AC drive, the AC drive
45 display fault and shut down.

46 Length counter input Length counter input terminals

47~63 RESERVED

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Polarity selection of
F05.09 the input terminals 0x00~0xFF 0x00 ○

This function code is used to set the polarity of the input terminals.

When the bit is set to a value of 0, the input terminal is positive polarity.

When the value is set to 1,the input terminal is negative polarity.

BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0

HDI1 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F05.10 ON-OFF filter time 0.000~1.000s 0.010s ○

Setting DI1~DI7, HDI1 terminal sampling filter time. In the large disturbance conditions, this
parameter should be increased to prevent misuse.

Input terminal status

Terminals valid logic
Terminal filter time

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F05.11 Virtual terminals setting 0~3 0 ○

0: Virtual terminal disabled.

1: MODBUS communication virtual terminal enabled.

2: CAN communication virtual terminal is valid

3: Profibus-DP communication virtual terminal is valid

-117-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Terminals control
F05.12 running mode 0~3 0 ◎

Setting up to the terminal control operation mode.multi function terminal DI setting, 1 as

FWD,2 as REV.

0: Two-line control 1: Enable unity and direction. This mode is the most commonly used two
line mode. FWD is forward running command input, REV is reverse running command input.

Running
K1 K2
K1 command
FWD
AC drive

OFF OFF Stop

K2 REV OFF ON Reverse
ON OFF Forward
COM
ON ON Stop

1: Two-line control 2. It enable the separation and orientation. Using this mode, FWD is
running command input, REV is direction control input.

Running
K1 K2
K1 command
FWD
AC drive

OFF OFF Stop

K2 REV ON OFF Forward

OFF ON Stop
COM
ON ON Reverse

2: Three-line control 1. The mode DIn is enabled terminal, FWD is run command input,
REV is direction control input. In usually, DIn connect to the normally closed button, FWD
connect to the normally open button.Shut down command is finished by disconnect with
DIN terminal.

Running
SB2 FWD SB1 SB2 K
command
AC drive

K OFF XX XX Stop
REV
ON ON OFF Forward
SB1 DIn
ON ON ON Reverse
COM ON OFF XX Maintain

-118-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

3: Three-line control 2.Din is enabled terminal, direction is controlled by FWD、 REV, but
the pulse is valid, when power off, please disconnect Din terminal to finish the process.

K1 SB1 K1 K2
Running
FWD command

AC drive
K2 OFF XX XX Stop
REV
ON ON OFF Forward
SB1 DIn ON OFF ON Reverse
ON ON ON Maintain
COM
ON OFF OFF Stop

Note:
About the two-line running mode, when theFWD / REV terminal is enabled, stop command
generated by other sources leaving the AC drive shutdown, even if control terminal FWD /
REV is still enable, the AC drive will not run after shutdown command disappear. If you
want the AC drive to run again, you need to trigger FWD / REV. Such as single cycle PLC
stop, fixed length control and effective control of the terminal STOP / RST stop (Refer to
F07.04).

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Switch-on delay
F05.13 of DI1 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-off delay
F05.14 of DI1 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-on delay
F05.15 of DI2 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-off delay
F05.16 of DI2 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-on delay
F05.17 of DI3 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-off delay
F05.18 of DI3 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-on delay
F05.19 of DI4 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-off delay
F05.20 of DI4 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-on delay
F05.21 of DI5 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-off delay
F05.22 of DI5 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-on delay
F05.23 of DI6 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-off delay
F05.24 of DI6 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

-119-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Switch-on delay
F05.25 of DI7 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-off delay
F05.26 of DI7 terminal 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Switch-on delay 0.000~50.000s(only F05.00=1 enable)

F05.27 of HDI1 terminal 0.000s ○

Switch-off delay 0.000~50.000s(only F05.00=1 enable)

F05.28 of HDI1 terminal 0.000s ○

Function Code defines the programmable input terminal’s corresponding delay time during
the level changing from the starting period to disconnected.

Terminal input pin

Enable
Terminals valid logic

Close delay time Cut Off delay time

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Hdi high-speed pulse

F05.29 input function selection 0~2 0 ◎

0: Frequency setting input

1: Counter input (Reserved)

2: Length count input

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Lower limit 0.00

F05.30 frequency of Hdi1 0.00KHz~F05.32 ○
KHz
Corresponding setting of
F05.31 lower limit frequency -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
of HDI1
Upper limit 50.00
F05.32 frequency of HDI 1 F05.30~50.00KHz ○
KHz
Corresponding setting of
F05.33 upper limit frequency -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○
of HDI1
HDI1 frequency
F05.34 input filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○

-120-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

When the HDI1 high-speed pulse input as a set frequency (F05.29 = 0), F05.30 ~ F05.33 to
set receive HDI1 of the upper and lower frequency, and its corresponding maximum frequ-
ency (F00.03) percentage.

HDI1 as set frequency in the frequency of A frequency instruction selection (F00.06), and B
frequency source used in the instruction selection (F00.07).

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F05.35 Reserved 0 0.010s ●

The parameter is Reserved.

Group F06 Output Terminal Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F06.00 HDO1 output 0~1 0 ◎

0: Open collector pole high speed pulse output (see F06.16 detailed information of the related
function)

1: Open collector poleoutput (seeF06.02 for detailed information of the realated function)

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F06.01 DO1 output 0 ○

F06.02 HDO1 output 0 ○

0~30
F06.03 Relay T1 output 1 ○

F06.04 Relay T2 output 5 ○

Output Terminal Group

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

0 Invalid 1 In operation

2 Forward rotation operation 3 Reverse rotation operation

4 Jogging operation 5 AC drive fault

6 Frequency degree test FDT1 7 Frequency degree test FDT2

8 Frequency arrival 9 Zero-speed running

-121-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

10 Upper limit frequency arrival 11 Lower limit frequency arrival

12 Ready for operation 13 Pre-Magnetizing

14 Overload pre-alarming 15 Underload per-alarming

16 Completion of Simple PLC stage 17 Completion of Simple PLC Circle

18 Setting count value arrival 19 Defined count value arrival

20 External fault valid 21 Length arrival

MODBUS communications
22 Running time arrival 23 virtual terminal output
Profibus-DP communication
24 AC drive is sleeping 25 virtual terminal output
26 Any frequency 1 arrival 27 Any frequency 2 arrival

28~30 reserved

Output Terminal Detail Introduction

Setting Function Instruction
Value
0 Invalid Output terminal without any function
When the AC drive in operation, there is frequency output,
1 In operation output ON signal.
Forward rotation When the AC drive in forward operation, there is frequency
2 operation output, output ON signal.
Reverse rotation When the AC drive in reverse operation, there is frequency
3 operation output, output ON signal.
When the AC drive in jogging operation, there is frequency
4 Jogging operation output, output ON signal.

5 AC drive fault When the AC drive failure, output ON signal.

Frequency degree Reference function code F08.14, F08.13 detailed instructions.
6 test FDT1
Frequency degree Reference function code F08.15, F08.16 detailed instructions.
7 test FDT2

8 Frequency arrival Reference function code F08.17 detailed instructions.

When the AC drive output frequency and the given frequency
9 Zero-speed running are zero, output ON signal.
Upper limit When the operating frequency reaches the upper limit frequency,
10 frequency arrival output ON signal.
Lower limit When the operating frequency reaches the lower limit frequency,
11 frequency arrival output ON signal.
The main circuit and control circuit power supply is set, AC drive
12 Ready for operation protection function does not work, when AC drive is in operation
state, output ON signal.

13 Pre-Magnetizing When the transducer is pre-magnetized, output ON signal.

Overload When the AC drive load in the above warning point, and warning
14 pre-alarming time is over, output ON signal. Refer to the function code F0C.08
~F0C.10 for details.

-122-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Setting Function Instruction

Value

Underload When the AC drive load in the lower warning point, and warning
15 per-alarming time is over, output ON signal. Refer to the function code F0C.11
~F0C.13 for details.
Completion of When the current phase of the simple PLC complete operation,
16 Simple PLC stage output signal.
Completion of
17 Simple PLC Circle When the simple PLC complete a cycle, output signal.

Setting count When the value of the test over F0A.10 set value, output ON
18 value arrival signal.
Defined count When the value of the test over F0A.11 set value, output ON
19 value arrival signal.
20 External fault valid When the external fault E.EF occurs, output ON signal.
When the actual length of the test is over the length of the F0A.04
21 Length arrival
set, output ON signal.
When the total running time of the AC drive over F0A.12 set time ,
22 Running time arrival
output ON signal.
MODBUS
communications Output signal is set according to the setting value of MODBUS,
23
virtual terminal output 1 for ON signal, 0 for OFF signal.

24 AC drive is sleeping When AC drive is sleeping, ON signal.

Profibus-DP Output corresponding signal according to the Profibus-DP given
25 communication virtual value, when set as 1, output signal is On, when set as 0, output
terminal output signal is OFF.
Any frequency 1
26 arrival Please refer to function code F08.34,F08.35 for details.

Any frequency 2 Please refer to function code F08.36,F08.37 for details.

27 arrival
28~30 reserved ------

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F06.05 Polarity of output terminals 0x00~0x0F 0x00 ○

The function code is used to set the pole of output terminals.

When the current bit is set to 0, the input terminals is positive.

When the current bit is set to 1, the input terminals is negative.

BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0

T2 T1 HDO1 DO1

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F06.06 DO1 switch-on delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

F06.07 DO1 switch- off delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

-123-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F06.08 HDO1 switch-on delay time 0.000~50.000s(only F06.00=1 enable) 0.000s ○

F06.09 HDO1 switch-off delay time 0.000~50.000s(onlyF06.00=1 enable) 0.000s ○

F06.10 T1 switch-on delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

F06.11 T1 switch-off delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

F06.12 T2 switch-on delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Relay T2 switch-off
F06.13 delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s ○

Function Code defines the programmable input terminal’s corresponding delay time during
the level changing from the starting period to disconnected.

Note: F06.08 and F06.09 valid only in F6.00 = 1.

Terminals valid logic

Terminal output pin Enable

Close delay time Cut Off delay time

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F06.14 AO1 output 0 ○

F06.15 AO2 output 0~20 0 ○

F06.16 HDO1 output 0 ○

The Output Definition Description of Analog Quantity or High Speed Pulse

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

0 Running frequency 1 Set frequency

2 Ramp reference frequency 3 Running rotation speed

Output current (relative to the Output current (relative to the
4 rated current of AC drive) 5 rated current of the motor)
6 Output voltage 7 Output torque

8 Set torque value 9 Output torque

10 Analog AI1 input value 11 Analog AI2 input value

12 Analog AI3 input value 13 High speed pulse HDI1 input value

14 PID reference 15 PID feedback

Modbus communications
16 reference 1 17 Modbus communications reference 2

-124-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

18 Bus voltage 19 Profibus-DP communication given 1

Profibus-DP communication
20 given 2

The Output Range Description of Analog Quantity or High Speed Pulse

Setting Function Instruction
Value
0 Running frequency 0~Maximum output frequency(Corresponding to 0~100%)

1 Set frequency 0~Maximum output frequency(Corresponding to 0~100%)

2 Ramp reference frequency 0~Maximum output frequency(Corresponding to 0~100%)

The motor rated synchronous speed 0~2 times
3 Running rotation speed
(corresponding to 0~100%)
Output current (relative The AC drive rated current 0~2 times
4 to the rated current of
AC drive) (corresponding to 0~100%)
Output current (relative The motor rated current 0~2 times
5 to the rated current of
the motor) (corresponding to 0~100%)
The AC drive rated voltage 0~1.5
6 Output voltage
(corresponding to 0~100%)

7 Output torque The rated power 0~2 times(corresponding to 0~100%)

The motor rated current 0~2 times

8 Set torque value
(corresponding to 0~100%)
The motor rated current 0~2 times
9 Output torque
(corresponding to 0~100%)
10 Analog AI1 input value 0~10V/0~20mA(corresponding to 0~100%)

11 Analog AI2 input value -10V~10V(corresponding to 0~100%)

12 Analog AI3 input value -10V~10V(corresponding to 0~100%)

High speed pulse
13 HDI1 input value 0.00~50.00kHz(corresponding to 0~100%)

14 PID reference -10V~10V(corresponding to 0~100%)

15 PID feedback -10V~10V(corresponding to 0~100%)

Modbus communications
16 reference 1 0.0%~100.0%(corresponding to 0~100%)

Modbus communications
17 reference 2 0.0%~100.0%(corresponding to 0~100%)

The standard bus voltage 0~2 time

Bus voltage (corresponding to 0~100%)
18
Standard bus voltage: 311V
(220V voltage level) 537V (380V voltage lines)
Profibus-DP
19 communication given 1 0.0%~100.0%（ corresponding 0~100%）

Profibus-DP
20 communication given 2 0.0%~100.0%（ corresponding 0~100%）

-125-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F06.17 Lower output limit of AO1 -100.0%~F06.19 0.0% ○

Corresponding AO1
F06.18 output of lower limit 0.00V~10.00V 0.00V ○

F06.19 Upper output limit of AO1 F06.17~100.0% 100.0% ○

The corresponding AO1

F06.20 output of upper limit 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ○

F06.21 AO1 output filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○

F06.22 Lower output limit of AO2 -100.0%~F06.24 0.0% ○

Corresponding AO2
F06.23 output of lower limit 0.00V~10.00V 0.0% ○

F06.24 Upper output limit of AO2 F06.22~100.0% 100.0% ○

The corresponding AO2

F06.25 output of upper limit 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V ○

F06.26 AO2 output filter time 0.000~10.000s 0.000s ○

F06.27 Lower output limit of HDO1 0.0%~F06.29 0.0% ○

Corresponding HDO1
F06.28 output of lower limit 0.00~50.00kHz 0.00Hz ○

F06.29 Upper output limit of HDO1 F06.27~100.0% 100.0% ○

Corresponding HDO1 50.00

F06.30 output of upper limit 0.00~50.00kHz kHz ○

F06.31 HDO1 output filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s ○

The above function codes define the corresponding relationship between the output value
and the analog output, when the output value over the external of the setting maximum
output or minimum output rang, calculate by the upper limit output or lower output.

The current output is analog output, 1mA is equivalent to 0.5V voltage.

In different applications the 100% of the output value is different from the corresponding
analog output, please refer to the above analog or high speed pulse output range table.

AO
Output
Voltage 10V(20mA)

100.0%
0%

-126-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group F07 HMI Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F07.00 User’s password 0~65535 0 ○

The password protection will be valid when setting any Non-zero number.

0.0.0.0.0:Clear the previous user's password, and make the password protection invalid.

After the set user's password becomes valid, if the password is incorrect, users cannot
enter the parameter menu.Only correct password can make the user check or modify the
parameters. Please remember all users' passwords.

Retreat editing state of the function codes and the password protection will become valid in
minute. If the valid password is available, press “PRG” to enter into the editing state of the
function codes, and then "0.0.0.0.0" will be displayed. Unless input right password, the
operator can not enter into it.

Note: Restoring to the default value can clear the password, please use it with caution.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
The key of S
F07.01 0~6 0 ◎
function selection

0: No function

1: Jogging. Press S key to begin the jogging running.

2: Shift the display state by the shifting key. Press S to shift the displayed function code
from right to left.

3: Shift between forward rotations and reverse rotations. Press S to shift the direction of the
frequency commands.This function is only valid in the keypad commands channels.

4: Clear UP/DOWN settings. Press S to clear the set value of UP/DOWN.

5: Coast to stop. Press S to coast stop.

6: Command source switch

Note: Press S key to shift between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the AC drive does
not remember the state after shifting during powering off. The AC drive will run in the
running direction set according to parameter F00.14 during next powering on.
S key function set as 6:
when F00.01 set as 0, S key command source switch is invalid.
when F00.01 set as 1 or 2(terminal), S key can achieve the switch between terminals and
operation panels.
When F00.01 set as 3 or 4(communication), S key can achieve the switch between
communication and operation panels.

-127-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F07.02 Parameters state 1 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0031 ○

The F07.02 Parameter Setting Function Table

Running Status Display Parameter Selection 1

BIT0 Running frequency(Hz ON) BIT1 Setting frequency(Hz flickering)

BIT2 Bus voltage(V ON) BIT3 Output voltage(V ON)

BIT4 Output current(A ON) BIT5 Runing rotation speed(rpm ON)

BIT6 Output power(% ON) BIT7 Output torque(% ON)

BIT8 PID reference (% ON) BIT9 PID feedback(% ON)

BIT10 Input state BIT11 Output terminal state

BIT12 Torque setting value(% ON) BIT13 Pulse count value

BIT14 Length value BIT15 PLC current segment number

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F07.03 Parameters state 2 0x0000~0x1FFF 0x0000 ○

The F07.03 Parameter Setting Function Table

Running Status Display Parameter Selection 2

The current number
BIT0 BIT1 AI1(V on)
of multistage speed
BIT2 AI2(V on) BIT3 AI3(V on)

BIT4 HDI frequency BIT5 Motor overload precentage(% on)

The inverter overload
BIT6 percentage(% on) BIT7 Ramp frequency given value(Hz on)

BIT8 Linear speed BIT9 AC inlet current(A on)

BIT10 Set rotary speed BI11 Set linear speed

BIT12 IGBT temperature BIT13~15 Reserved

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Parameters for
F07.04 stopping state 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x03FF ○

-128-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

The F07.04 Parameter Setting Function Table

Stop Status Display Parameter Selection

Set frequency
BIT0 BIT1 Bus voltage(V on)
(Hz on, frequency flicking slowly)
BIT2 Input terminals state BIT3 Output terminals state

BIT4 PID reference(% flicking) BIT5 Set rotary speed

BIT6 Ttorque refernece(% on) BIT7 AI1(V on)

BIT8 AI2(V on) BIT9 AI3(V on)

BIT10 HDI1 frequency BIT11 PLC current stage

BIT12 Set linear speed BIT13 Pulse counters

BIT14 Length value BIT15 IGBT temperature

Note: Running and stop state display as hexadecimal mode, ones equal to BIT0-BIT3, tens
equal to BIT4-BIT7, hundreds to BIT8-BIT11, thousands to BIT12-BIT15, if you want to
display one specific parameter, you need to set the BIT as 1, and then input the
corresponding hexadecimal number to the parameter, Press the "SHIFT" key for loop
display after all the setting.

Example: Displayed as output terminal status, analog AI2, setting linear speed in stopping
state, the corresponding BIT3, BIT8, BIT12 is set to 1, the corresponding value is
0001000100001000(B), hexadecimal is 1108(H) need to be set in F07.04.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F07.05 Frequency coefficient 0.01~20.00 1 ○

F07.06 Rotation Speed 0.1~999.9% 100.0% ○

F07.07 Linear speed coefficient 0.1~999.9% 1.0% ○

Display frequency=Running frequency×F07.05.

Mechanical rotation speed=60×running frequency×F07.06/Motor pole pairs.

Linear speed=Mechanical rotation speed×F07.07.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Rectifier bridge ----
F07.08 module temperature -20.0~120.0 ●
Converter module ----
F07.09 temperature -20.0~120.0 ●

F07.10 Software version 1.00~655.35 ---- ●

Local accumulative ----
F07.11 running time 0~65535h ●

These parameters only can be viewed not modified.

-129-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F07.12 Reserved 0 ---- ●

F07.13 Reserved 0 ---- ●

Above parameters are Reserved.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0: G type Constant torque load ----
F07.14 Load Type 1: P type Variable torque load ●

F07.15 AC drive rated power 0.4~1000.0kW ---- ●

F07.16 AC drive rated voltage 20~1200V ---- ●

F07.17 AC drive rated current 0.1~6000.0A ---- ●

These parameters only can be viewed not modified.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F07.18 Current fault type ---- ●

The 1 times ----

F07.19 before fault type ●

The 2 times ----

F07.20 before fault type ●
Please refer to Chapter 8 8.7
Fault Instruction and Solution
The 3 times ----
F07.21 before fault type ●

The 4 times ----

F07.22 before fault type ●

The 5 times ----

F07.23 before fault type ●

The above parameters on behalf of the specific fault type, please refer to Chapter 8 AC
drive Fault.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Running frequency ----

F07.24 0.00Hz ●
at current fault

Ramp reference ----

F07.25 0.00Hz ●
frequency at current fault

-130-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

output voltage ----

F07.26 0V ●
at the current fault

output current ----

F07.27 0.0A ●
at current fault

F07.28 Bus voltage at current fault ---- 0.0V ●

The Max. temperature ----

F07.29 0.0 ●
at current fault

Input terminals state ----

F07.30 0 ●
at current fault

Output terminals state ----

F07.31 0 ●
at current fault

The above parameters record the AC drive internal variable records when current fault
occurs, please refer tothe function code of each specific display.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Running frequency ----

F07.32 at previous fault 0.00Hz ●

Ramp reference frequency ----

F07.33 at previous fault 0.00Hz ●

Output voltage ----

F07.34 at previous fault 0V ●

The output current ----

F07.35 at previous fault 0.0A ●

Bus voltage ----

F07.36 at previous fault 0.0V ●

The Max. temperature ----

F07.37 at previous fault 0.0℃ ●

Input terminals state ----

F07.38 at previous fault 0 ●

Output terminals ----

F07.39 state at previous fault 0 ●

These parameters record the AC drive internal variables at previous, the record of the input
and output variables, referring to the function code specific display.

-131-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Running frequency ----

F07.40 at previous 2 fault 0.0A ●

Ramp reference frequency ----

F07.41 at previous 2 fault 0.0V ●

Output voltage ----

F07.42 at previous 2 faults 0.0℃ ●

Output current ----

F07.43 at previous 2 fault 0 ●

Bus voltage ----

F07.44 at previous 2 fault 0 ●

The Max. temprature ----

F07.45 at previous 2 fault 0.0℃ ●

Input terminals state ----

F07.46 at previous 2 fault 0 ●

Output terminals state ----

F07.47 at previous 2 fault 0 ●

The above parameters record internal input and output variables when the 2 times faults
occurred, see function code specific display.

-132-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group F08 Strengthen Function Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

Model
F08.00 ACC time2 0.0~6000.0s dependent ○

Model
F08.01 DEC time2 0.0~6000.0s dependent ○

Model
F08.02 ACC time3 0.0~6000.0s dependent ○

Model
F08.03 DEC time3 0.0~6000.0s dependent ○

Model
F08.04 ACC time4 0.0~6000.0s dependent ○

Model
F08.05 DEC time4 0.0~6000.0s dependent ○

SD200 series defines four groups acc/dec time, through the multi-function digital inputs
(F05) to choose Acc. and Dec. time. The AC drive Dec and Acc time factory defaults is
group 1 time.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.06 Jogging frequency 0.00~F00.03（ Max. frequency） 5.00Hz ○

The parameter set the reference frequency of the AC drive in jogging running.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Model
F08.07 Jogging ACC time 0.00~6000.0s dependent ○

Model
F08.08 Jogging DEC time 0.00~6000.0s dependent ○

The jogging ACC time means the time needed if the AC drive runs from 0hz to the Max
frequency (F00.03).

The jogging DEC time means the time needed if the AC drive goes from the Max.
Frequency (F0.03) to 0hz.

-133-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.09 Fault reset times 0~10 0 ○

Interval time of
F08.10 0.1~100.0s 1.0s ○
automatic fault reset

Fault auto reset times: When the AC drive selects fault auto reset, it used to set the times
of auto reset. During unit time, When continue reset exceed this value, the AC drive will
report downtime awaiting restoration and calculate the number of times when cannot
reset.

Fault auto reset interval: The time interval between the fault and automatic resets.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Frequency decreasing ratio
F08.11 of the dropping control 0.00~10.00Hz 0.00Hz ○

When multiple AC drives drive in the same load, AC drives impose different loads, by
setting this parameter, allows multiple AC drives to achieve uniform load distribution in the
same drive load.

During the decreasing drop control process AC drive will have real time test on the load
.The AC drive will reduce the load according to the size and value of the load of this
parameter setting to achieve a balance output. F08.11 means the decreasing frequency
amount of the rated load.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.12 Motor shifting 0~3 0 ◎

0: Terminal switch.

1: MODBUS Communication shifting.

2: CAN Communication shifting.

3: Profibus-DP communication switch

SD200 series supports two motors switching control, the parameter F08.12 is used to
select switch channel.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

FDT1 electrical
F08.13 0.00~F00.03(Max. frequency) 50.00Hz ○
level detection value

FDT1 retention 0.0~100.0%(FDT1 level)

F08.14 5.0% ○
detection value

-134-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

FDT2 electrical 0.00~F00.03(Max. frequency)

F08.15 50.00Hz ○
level detection

FDT2 retention -100.0~100.0%(FDT2 level)

F08.16 5.0% ○
detection value

When the output frequency exceeeds the corresponding frequency of FDT electrical level,
the multi-function digital output terminals will output the signal of "frequency level detect
FDT" until the output frequency decreases to a value lower than(FDT electrical level-FDT
retention detection value)the corresponding frequency, the signal is invalid. Below is the
ware form diagram:
f Output frequency
FDT
level detection value FDT level detection value

time

Do1 time
TI,T2

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Frequency arrival 0.0~F00.03(Max. frequency)

F08.17 0.00Hz ○
detection value

When the output frequency is among the positive or negative detection range of the set
frequency, the multi-function digital output terminal will output the signal of "frequency
arrival", see the diagram below for detailed information:

Output frequency
Frequency arrival detection value
Setting frequency

time

Output terminal level

DO1
TI,T2 time

-135-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.18 Energy braking enable 0~1 1 ○

This parameter is used to control the internal braking pipe inside the inverter.

0: Disable

1: Enable

Note:Only applied to internal Braking unit.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
220V
350.0~2000.0V (380V)
F08.19 Threshold voltage ○
600.0~2000.0V 380V
(700V)

After setting the original bus voltage to brake the energy, adjust the voltage appropriately to
brake the load. The factory changes with the voltage level.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

PWM over
F08.20 0~1 1 ◎
commission selection

0: Overmodulation is invalid

1: Overmodulation is valid

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.21 Keypad data control 0x000~0x1221 0x0000 ○

Integral ratio
F08.22 of the keypad∧ / ∨ 0.01~10.00s 1.0s ○

F08.21 Parameter Setting Function

Keypad digital control set
Frequency enable selection
LED ones 0: ∧ / ∨ valid
1: ∧ / ∨ invalid
Frequency control selection
0: Only valid when F00.06=0 orF00.07=0 setting valid
LED tens 1: Valid for all frequency setting manner
2: Invalid for multi-step speed when multi-step speed has the priority

-136-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Action selection during stopping

0: Setting is valid
LED hundreds 1: Valid during running, cleared after stopping
2: Valid during running, cleared after receiving the stop command

∧ / ∨ keys and digital potentiometer integral function

LED thousands 0: The integral function is valid
1: The integral function is invalid

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

UP/DOWN
F08.23 0x00~0x221 0x000 ○
terminal control

F08.23 Parameter Setting Function

UP/DOWN terminals control

Frequency control selection
LED ones 0: UP/DOWN terminals setting valid
1: UP/DOWN terminals setting invalid
Frequency control selection
0: Only valid when F00.06=0 orF00.07=0
LED tens 1: All frequency means are valid
2: When the multi-step are priority, it is invalid to the multi-step

Stop action selection

0: Setting valid
LED hundreds 1: Valid in the running, clear after stop
2: Valid in the running, clear after receiving the stop commands

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

UP terminals frequency
F08.24 changing ratio 0.01~50.00s 0.50s ○

DOWN terminals
F08.25 frequency changing ratio 0.01~50.00s 0.50s ○

When the above two parameters is valid during the control of the terminal UP/DOWN frequ-
ency, set the allowance integral effect, the smaller the value is, the quicker the integral rate.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Frequency
F08.26 setting at power loss 0x000~0x111 0x000 ○

-137-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

F08.26 Parameter Setting Function

Frequency setting at power loss

Action selection when power off
LED ones 0: Save when power off
1: Clear when power off
Action selection when MODBUS set frequency off
LED tens 0: Save when power off
1: Clear when power off
The action selection when other frequency set frequeny off
LED hundreds 0: Save when power off
1: Clear when power off

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.27 Magnetic flux braking 0~100 0 ○

This function code is used to enable4 magnetic flux.

0: Invalid

0~100: Valid

When increase the magnetic flux to decelerate the motor, the energy generated by the
motor during braking can be converter into heat energy by increasing the magnetic flux.
With this function, decelerating time is shorten while running current is larger. When
magnetic flux braking with no actions, motor speed decreasing while the decreasing time is
longer.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.28 Auxiliary Monitoring 0~28 1 ○

Supporting function parameters selection instruction

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition

0 Running frequency 1 Set frequency

2 Bus voltage 3 Output voltage

4 Output current 5 Running rotation speed

6 Output power 7 Output torque

8 PID reference 9 PID feedback

10 Input terminals state 11 Output terminals state

12 Torque setting value 13 Pulse counter value

14 Length value 15 PLC current stage

-138-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Supporting function parameters selection instruction

Function Function
setting Function Definition setting Function Definition
The current number
16 of multi-stage speed 17 AI1 value

18 AI2 value 19 AI3 value

20 HDI1 frequency 21 Motor overload percentage(% on)

AC drive overload
22 23 Ramp frequency given value(Hz on)
percentage(% on)
24 Linear speed 25 AC inlet current(A on)

26 Set rotary speed 27 Set linear speed

28 IGBT temperature

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.29 Parameter copy selection 0~3 0 ◎

0: No operation;

1: Control panel parameter upload to the keypad EEPROM；

2: Keypad EEPROM parameter download to the control panel and do not download motor
parameter;

3: Keypad EEPROM parameter download to the control panel and download motor
parameter;
Note: There must be operate parameter copy in the stop state, it only can be downloaded
parameter to the control panel in the same software version and ac drive series,A02.35
ecords upload reserve keypad parameter version, and depend on the parameter confirm
keypad reserve current parameter version whether consistent with control panel.
This is expand function and need to match copy keypad.
Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F08.30 IO expansion card 0~1 0 ○

F08.30 is for IO expansion card selection.

When F08.30=0, IO expansion card is invalid, relative function parameter is invalid.

When F08.30=1, IO expansion card is valid, relative function parameter is valid.(Insert IO

expansion card into the control board expansion port )

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Power failure under

F08.31 voltage decelerate stop 0~1 0 ○

0: invalid;

1: valid.

-139-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Power failure under

F08.32 voltage decelerate time 0~6000.0 s 0 ○

200V(3 phase)
Run power failure decel-
F08.33 erate cut-off voltage 80~800V ◎
120V(single phase)

When power failure under voltage in running state, some applications are not allow
freedom downtime, increase this parameter to ensure drive quick shutdown when power
down . After this function is active, the drive will slow down to stop immediately when power
failure in running state. Deceleration time in this state is determined by F08.32. When the
bus voltage is lower than F08.33, close PWM to protect the AC drive hardware.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Detection time 1 of
F08.34 arbitrary frequency 0~F00.03 50.00Hz ○
arrival
Detection width 1 of
F08.35 arbitrary frequency 0~100.0%(Max. frequency) 0.0% ○
arrival
Detection time 2 of
F08.36 arbitrary frequency 0~F00.03 50.00Hz ○
arrival
Detection width 2 of
F08.37 arbitrary frequency 0~100.0%(Max. frequency) 0.0% ○
arrival

When the output frequency in range of the positive and negative detection width of the
arbitrary frequency arrival detection value, the multi-function digital output terminal output
"arbitrary frequency arrival " signal, the specific waveform as follows:

running frequency Hz

any arrival frequency detection range

frequency test value frequency detection range

Time
ON ON
any arrival frequency OFF OFF OFF
test terminal DO or relay
Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation
Jogging selection under 0: Enable
F08.38 running situation 0 ○
1: Disable

0:Jogging is vilid under running situation;

1:Jogging is invilid under running situation.

-140-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.39 Binding command source ◎

0x000~0xCCC 0x000
to frequency source

Binding operation panel command to frequency source

0: No binding
1: Keypad digital setting
2: Keypad potentiometer setting
3: Analog AI1 setting
4: Analog AI2 setting
5: Analog AI3 setting
Unit's digit 6: High-speed pulse HDI1 setting
7: Simple PLC program setting
8: Multi-speed running setting
9: PID control setting
A: MODBUS Communication setting
B: CAN Communication setting
C: Profibus-DP communication setting

Binding terminal command to frequency source

Ten's digit 0–C, same as unit's digit

Binding communication command to frequency source

Hundred's digit 0–C, same as unit's digit

It is used to bind the three running command sources with the twelve frequency sources,
facilitating to implement synchronous switchover.

For details on the frequency sources, see the description of F00.06 (Main frequency source
A selection). Different running command sources can be bound to the same frequency
source.

If a command source has a bound frequency source, the frequency source set in F00.06 to
F00.07 no longer takes effect when the command source is effective.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F08.40 Brake use ratio 0.0%~100.0% 100.0% ◎

It is valid only for the AC drive with internal braking unit and used to adjust the duty ratio of
the braking unit. The larger the value of this parameter is, the better the braking result will
be. However, too larger value causes great fluctuation of the AC drive bus voltage during
thebraking process.

-141-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

-142-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group F09 PID Control Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F09.00 PID reference source 0~9 0 ○

0: Keypad (F09.01)
1: Ai1
2: Ai2
3: Ai3
4: HDI1
5: Multi-step speed set
6: MODBUS communication set
7: CAN communication set
8: Profibus-DP communication setting
9: Panel potentiometer
Note: Multi-step speed given, it is realized by setting FA group parameters.CAN
communication setting need corresponding extension cards.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.01 Keypad PID preset 0~100.0% 50.0% ○

When F09.00=0, set the parameter whose basic value is the response value of the system.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Keypad
F09.02 0~6 0 ○
feedback source

0: Ai1
1: Ai2
2: Ai3
3: HDI1
4: MODBUS communication feedback
5: CAN communication feedback
6: Profibus-DP communication feedback

Note:The reference and feedback channel can not coincide, otherwise, PID can not control
effectively. 5,6 is extension function, please insert appropriate expansion cards.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.03 PID output feature 0~1 0 ○

-143-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

0: PID output is positive: When the feedback signal exceeds the PID given value, the
output frequency of the AC drive will decrease to balance the PID. For example, the strain
PID control during warpup.

1: PID output is negative: When the feedback signal is stronger than the PID given value,
the output frequency of the AC drive will increase to balance the PID. For example, the
strain PID control during warpdown.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.04 Proportional gain(Kp) 0.00~100.00 0.50 ○

The function is applied to the proportional gain P of PID input. P determines the strength of
the whole PID adjuster. The parameter of 100 means that when the offset of PID feedback
and given value is 100%, the adjusting range of PID adjustor is the Max.
frequency(ignoring integral and differential function).

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.05 Intergal time(Ti) 0.00~10.00s 0.20s ○

The parameter integral time(Ti 1) of the set PID controller that determines the PID feedback
value and the reference amount of integral regulation speed.

When the PID feedback quantity and ration deviation are 100%, integral regulators (Ignore
the proportional action and derivative action) through continuous adjustment of the time,
the adjust the amount arrive the maximum output frequency (F00.03) or maximum Max
voltage (F04.31).The shorter of the integration time adjustment, the greater of the intensity.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.06 Differential time(Td) 0.00~10.00s 0.00s ○

This parameter determines the speed of PID adjustor to carry out integral adjustment on the
deviation of PID feedback and reference. When the deviation of PID feedback and reference is
100%, the integral adjustor works continuously after the time(ignoring the proportional effect and
differential effect) to achieve the Max. Frequency(F00.03) or the Max. Voltage(F04.31). Shorter
the integral time, stronger is the adjustment.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.07 Sampling cycle(T) 0.00~10.00s 0.10s ○

This parameter means the sampling cycle of the feedback. The adjustor operates each
sampling cycle. The longer the sampling cycle is, slower the response is.

-144-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.08 PID control 0.00~10.00% 0.2% ○

deviation limit

The output of PID system is the maximum deviation relative to close loop reference. As
shown in the diagram below, PID adjustor stops to work during the deviation limit. Set the
function properly to adjust the accuracy and stability of the system.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.09 Output upper limit of PID F09.10~100.0%(max. frequency or voltage) 0.0% ○

F09.10 Output lower limit of PID -100.0~F09.09(max. frequency or voltage) 100.0% ○

This parameter is used to set the upper and lower limit of the PID adjustor output.100%
corresponds to the max. frequency (F00.03) or the max. voltage of (F04.31).

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Detection value
F09.11 0.0~100.0% 0.0% ○
of feedback offline

Detection time
F09.12 0.0~3600.0s 1.0s ○
of feedback offline

Set the detection value of feedback offline, when the feedback detection value is smaller
than or equals to the detected value, and the lasting time exceeds the set value in F09.12,
the AC drive will report" PID feedback offline fault" and the keypad will display E.PId.

Output frequency f
t1<t2 Frequency continue running
t2=F09.12

E.PId
F09.11

time

t1 t2
Running Fault output E.PId

-145-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.13 PID adjustment 0x0000~0x1111 0x1100 ○

F09.13 Parameter Setting Function

Frequency setting power failure action selection
0: Keep on integral adjustment when the frequency achieves the upper and low
limit; the integration shows the change between the reference and the feedback
unless it reaches the internal integral limit. When the trend between the reference
and the feedback changes, it needs more time to offset the impact of continuous
LED ones working and the integration will change with the trend.
1: Stop integral adjustment when the frequency achieves the upper and low limit. If
the integration keeps stable, and the trend between the reference and the feedback
changes, the integration will change with the trend quickly.

0: The same with setting direction; if the output of PID adjustment is different from
LED tens the current running direction, the internal will output 0 forcedly.
1: Opposite to the setting direction
0: PID given value cannot adjust by the UP/DOWN key.
LED hundreds
1: PID given value can adjust by the UP/DOWN key.
0: When AC drive power off, PID given value set UP/DOWN by will not save.
LED thousands
1: When AC drive power off, PID given value set UP/DOWN by will save.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.14 Proportional gain 2(Kp2) 0.00~100.00 0.50 ○

F09.15 Integral time(Ti2) 0.00~10.00s 0.2S ○

F09.16 Differential time(Td2) 0.00~10.00s 0.00S ○

Above 3 parameters is the second group for PID control in terms of ratio,integral,differential,
the function and meanning is similar to the first group(F09.04,F09.05,F09.06), these 2
groups parameter are switched by F09.17.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

PID Parameters
F09.17 0~2 0 ◎
Switching

This parameter applied to PID 2 groups(Kp1,Ti1,Td1;Kp2,Ti2,Td2) switch condition.

0: No switching, only apply the first group parameters F09.04,F09.05,F09.06.

1:Switching according to the deviation between current PID feedback value and given
value. Deviation threshold depends on the setting of F09.18;when deviation＜ F09.18，
please apply to the first groups of F09.04、F09.05、F09.06,when the deviation＞F09.18，
please apply to the second groups of F09.14、F09.15.

2: Switching according to the input terminals, when input terminals "PID parameter
switching" is OFF,please use the first groups of F09.04、 F09.05、 F09.06.When hen input
terminals "PID parameter switching" is ON, please use the second groups parameters
F09.14,F09.15,F09.16.

-146-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Deviation threshold
F09.18 when PID is switching 0.0%~100.0% 20% ○

WhenF09.17=1,F09.18 is used for setting the deviation threshold value when PID parame-
ters are switching.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
PID Hibernate 0.00~F00.03(Max Frequency) ○
F09.19 Frequency 0.0

PID Hibernate ○
F09.20 Delay Time 0.0~3600.0s 30.0s

When the PID output frequency is less than the PID Hibernate frequency setted by F09.19,
after the PID hibernate delay time setted by F09.20, AC drive will enter into the hibernate
status and stop by the way of coasting to stop

Select 24 as the output teminal function(AC drive was in hibernation status), AC drive will
come into the hiberation status, Output terminals can be used to output.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.21 PID Awaken Value 0.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

PID Awaken
F09.22 Value delay time 0.0~60.0s 0.50S ○

When AC drive is in sleeping state, PID feedback value≤(PID given valueXF09.21), with the
delay time of PID Awaken Values which is set by F09.22, the AC drive will be awakened
and restart.

PID feedback
Awaken value delay timeF09.22

Awaken value F09.21

Time
PIDOutput（output frequency）

Td=Sleeping delay timeF09.20

t<Td Td

Awaken frequency F09.19

Time
Stop Start
PID Sleeping/Awaken Diagram

-147-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.23 PID Preset Value 0.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

PID Preset Value
F09.24 Keeping time 0.0~600.0s 0.0s ○

PID preset value is set to 0, when PID preset value keep running for a period(Preset value
keeping time as F09.24),PID begin the adjustment from preset value and PID output is
more smooth with this funciton.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0: the frequency source is given from other
given switching to PID, and the initial value
PID initial value
F09.25
restart valid selection
is invalid. 0 ○
1: the frequency source runs efficiently from
other given handover to PID given.

0: the frequency source is given from other given switching to PID, and the initial value is invalid.
1: the frequency source is given from other given switching to PID, and the initial value is valid

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.26 PID second digital given 0.0~100.0% 50.0% ○

Through terminal function: 44, implement PID given source switch.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.27 PID range 0~9999 100 ○

F09.28 PID range decimal number 0~3 1 ○

PID given feedback range is a dimensionless unit, used as a display of PID's given and
feedback.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F09.29 PID Hibernate 0: Decelerate to stop

1: Coast to stop
1 ○
stop mode

This parameter is used to select the shutdown mode when PID enters the sleep state.
Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation
PID feedback limit 0.0~100.0% ○
F09.30 100.0%
detection value
PID feedback limit
F09.31 0.0~3600.0s 1.0s ○
detection time
When PID feedback is higher than F09.30 and last F09.31 setting detection time,Inverter
enters dormancy state.The panel shows "SLEEP", and the shutdown mode is determined
by F09.29.
This parameter can interact with F09.19 and F09.20 to determine PID dormancy

-148-
 F09.17
Control parameter
switch
SD200 User Manual

F09.01 F09.00 F09.04、F09.14

Keypad Preset
PID reference 0:Keypad digital reference Proportional gain
(Kp) The first part of F09.13
1:AI1 analog channel reference F09.07 F09.03
Sampling period
2:AI2 analog channel reference
+

3:AI3 analog channel reference Integral gain

+
Deviation
4:High-speed pulse HDI limit (Ti)
reference
+

-
-1
PID control diagram as below:

5:Multispeed reference F09.08

6:MODBUS communication Output polarity selection
setting Integral selection
Differential gain
7:CAN communication (Td)
setting
8:Profibus-DP Communication
set

-149-
9:Panel potentiometer

PID pause
The third part of F09.13
F09.02
0:AI1 analog channel reference F09.09 upper limit、 F09.10 lower limit
1:AI2 analog channel reference Limiting
2:AI3 analog channel reference Output
frequency
3:High-speed pulse HDI
reference
4:MODBUS communication
setting
5:CAN communication
setting
PI output and transport
6:Profibus-DP communication direction relations
feedback The last PID output
PID control diagram
Chapter 6 Parameter Description
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Simple Illustration of the PID Control Operation and Adjustment

Proportional adjustment (Kp):

When there is a deviation between the feedback and reference, a proportional adjustment
will be output. If the deviation is constant, the adjustment will be constant, too. Proportional
adjustment can respond to the feedback change quickly, but it can not realize non-fault
control. The proportional gain will increase with the adjustment speed, but too much gain
may cause vibration. The adjustment method is: set a long integral time and derivative time
to 0 first. Secondly make the system run by proportional adjustment and change the
reference. And then watch the deviation of the feedback signal and the reference. If the
static deviation is available (for example, increasing the feedback reference, the feedback
will be less than the reference after a stable system), continue to increase the proportional
gain, whereas decreased proportional gain. Repeat the action until the static deviation
achieves a little. Value.

Integral time(Ti):

When there is a deviation between the feedback and reference, the output adjustment will
accumulate. 0The adjustment will keep on increasing until the deviation disappears. The
integral adjuster can cancel eliminate the static deviation effectively. Vibration may occur as
a result of unstable system caused by repeated over-adjusted if the integral adjuster is too
strong. The features of kind of vibration are: the fluctuating feedback signal (around the
reference) and increasing swing range will cause vibration. Adjust the integral time
parameter from a big value to a little one to change the integral time and monitor the result
until a stable system speed is available.

Derivative time(Td):

When the deviation between the feedback and reference has changed, a proportional
adjustment of output and deviation will be output. The adjustment only depends on the
direction and value of the deviation change rather than the deviation itself. The derivation
adjustment controls the change of eedback signals according to the changing trend when it
fluctuates. Because of the derivative adjustment may enlarge the interference to the
system, especially the frequent-changing interference, please use it carefully. When the
frequency command selection (F00.06, F00. 07) is 8 or the voltage setting channel
selection (F04.27) is 6, the running mode of the AC drive is process PID control.

-150-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

General steps of PID parameters setting

a. Ensure the proportional gain P
When ensure the proportional gain P, firstly remove the PID integration and derivation (set
Ti=0 and Td=0, see the PID parameter setting for detailed information) to make
proportional adjustment is the only method to PID. Set the input as 60%~70% of the
permitted maximum value and increase gain P from 0 until the system vibration occurs,
vice versa, and record the PID value and set it to 60% to 70% of the current value. Then
the proportional gain P commission is finished.

b. Ensure the integral time Ti

After ensure the gain P, set an original value of a bigger integral time and decrease it until
the system vibration occurs, vice versa, until the system vibration disappear. Record the Ti
and set the integral time to 150%~180% of the current value. Then integral time
commission is finished.

c. Ensure the differential time Td

Generally, it is not necessary to set Td which is 0.If it needs to be set, set it to30% of the
value without vibration via the same method with P and Ti.

d. Ensure system no-load with load transfer, and then fine tuning the PID parameters until it
is available.

PID Inching:
After setting the parameters of PID control, inching is possible by following means:

Control the overshoot :

shorten the derivative time(Td) and prolong the integral time(Ti) when appear overshoot.

Before adjustment

Respond

After adjustment

-151-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Reduce the stability of time:

Shorten the integral time (Ti) and prolong the derivation time(Td) even the overshoot
occurs, but the control should be stable as soon as possible.

After adjustment

Respond

Before adjustment

Control long vibration:

If the vibration period are longer than the set value of integral time(Ti), is is necessary to
prolong the integral time(Ti) to control the vibration for the strong integration.

Before adjustment

Respond

After adjustment

Control short vibration

Short vibration period and the same set value with the derivative time(Td) can control the
vibration. When setting the derivative time as 0.00(no derivation control) is useless to
control the vibration, decrease the gain.

After adjustment

Respond

Before adjustment

-152-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group F0A Wobble, Length, Count and Timing Parameters Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

Swing frequency
F0A.00 amplitude 0.0~100.0%(Setting frequency) 0.0% ○

Kick frequency
F0A.01 amplitude 0.0~100.0%(Swing frequency amplitude) 0.0% ○

Rise time of
F0A.02 swing frequency 0.0~3600.0s 0.0s ○

Decline time of
F0A.03 swing frequency 0.0~3600.0s 0.0s ○

Traverse is applied in some industries such as textile, chemical fiber and cases where
traverse and convoltion is required.

Swing frequency function is the AC drive output frequency to set the frequency as the
center of the upper and lower swing. The working flowchart is as below:

f(Output frequency)
kick frequency
amplitude Kick frequency
amplitude
Center
frequency

Accelerate with Decelerate

acceleration time with decelerate time
Decline time Rise time of
of swing frequency swing frequency time

Swing amplitude is determined by F0A.00, when F0A.00, swing frequency is 0, means

swing frequency is invalid.

Swing frequency amplitude: The frequency is restricted by the upper/down frequency.

Swing relative to the center frequency (set frequency): Swing frequency amplitude AW =
center frequency F0A.00.

The kick frequency=Swing frequency amplitude AW×the kick frequency amplitude F0A.01,
that is the swing frequency operation , the value of the frequency of sudden jump swing.

Rise time of swing frequency: Running from the lowest point to the highest point of the
wobble amount of time.

Decline time of swing frequency:Running from the highest point to the lowest point of the
wobble amount of time.

-153-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0A.04 Setup length 0~65536m 0m ○

F0A.05 Designed length 0~65536m 0m ●

Setting length, the actual length and the unit pulses number of the three functional ones
are mainly used code length control.

HDI1 is calculated by the length of the pulse signal input terminal, it need to set HDI1
terminal to length count input.

Actual length = Length count input pulses/ones pulses.

When the actual length exceeds the length FA.05 F0A.04, multifunction digital out terminal
"length reached" theoutput ON signal.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

The number of
F0A.06 pulses of each rotate 1~10000 1 ○

Circumference
F0A.07 0.01~100.00cm 10.00cm ○
of the shaft

F0A.08 Length multiples 0.001~10.000 1.000 ○

F0A.09 Length correction factor 0.001~1.000 1.000 ○

F0A.06 number of Pulse per rotation refers to the outer rotating per revolution of shaft input
the number of pulses.

F0A.07 Alxe perimeter refers to the outer perimeter of the circumference of the rotary shaft
length. The unit is cm.

The AC drive calculate total length = (length calculated by Pulse ) × F0A.08 × F0A.09.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0A.10 Set count value F0A.11~65535 0 ○

F0A.11 Designated count value 0~F0A.10 0 ○

SD200 series AC drive support fixed-length control function which can input length counting
pulse through HDI1, and then count the actual length according to the internal counting
formula.

If the actual length is longer than or equal to the set length, the digital output terminal can
output the length arrival pulse signal of 200ms and the corresponding length will clear
automatically.

-154-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

F0A.11 designated counting value is not greater than the set count value F0A.10.

The function as shown:

Count pulse input

Count Reset Information

F0A.11=5
Reaching the set count
F0A.10=9
Setup counter arrive

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0A.12 Running time setting 0~65535min 0 ○

Pre-seting AC drive running time. When the accumulated running time reaches the setting
running time, the multi-function digital output terminal "Running time arrival" signal.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0A.13 Exact stop mode 0~3 0 ○

0: Invalid

1: Setting length arrive

2: Setting count value arrive

3: Setting running time arrive

When F0A.13 is set to non-0, the inverter will stop when the condition is satisfied according
to the set condition.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0A.14 Actual running time 0~65535min 0 ●

Display running actual time of the AC Drive

-155-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Group F0B Simple PLC and Multi-speed Control Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F0B.00 Simple PLC running method 0~2 0 ○

0: Stopping after a running cycle. The AC drive automatically shut down after complete a
single cycle, it need to give a run command again to start.

1: Keeping final value operation after a running cycle. The AC drive automatically maintain
the operating frequency and direction of the last paragraph after complete a single cycle.

2: Cycle running. The AC drive automatically starts the next cycle until appear stop
command and the system stop after complete a single cycle.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Simple PLC memory

F0B.01 selection when in power loss 0~1 0 ○

0: Power failure without memory

1: Power failure with memory

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

Simple PLC 0: Power loss without memory

F0B.01 memory selection 1: Power loss memory 0 ○

F0B.02 Multi-step speed 0 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.03 The running time of step 0 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.04 Multi-step speed 1 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.05 The running time of step 1 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.06 Multi-step speed 2 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.07 The running time of step 2 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.08 Multi-step speed 3 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.09 The running time of step 3 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.10 Multi-step speed 4 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.11 The running time of step 4 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.12 Multi-step speed 5 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.13 The running time of step 5 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.14 Multi-step speed 6 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.15 The running time of step 6 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.16 Multi-step speed 7 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.17 The running time of step 7 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

-156-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0B.18 Multi-step speed 8 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.19 The running time of step 8 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.20 Multi-step speed 9 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.21 The running time of step 9 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.22 Multi-step speed 10 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.23 The running time of step 10 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.24 Multi-step speed 11 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.25 The running time of step 11 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.26 Multi-step speed 12 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.27 The running time of step 12 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.28 Multi-step speed 13 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.29 The running time of step 13 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.30 Multi-step speed 14 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.31 The running time of step 14 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

F0B.32 Multi-step speed 15 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ○

F0B.33 The running time of step 15 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s ○

Frequency setting100% corresponds to the maximum output frequency F00.03.

When choosing simple PLC runtime, it need to set F0B.02 ~ F0B.33 to determine its opera-
ting frequency and direction.

Note:
Multi-step speed sign determines the direction of simple PLC. The negative value indicates
reverse direction.

Multi-step speed can continuous set within -f max. ~ f max. range.

Sd200 AC drive can be set to 16-speed, which multi-step speed terminal by a combination
of coding select 1 ~ 4, it corresponding multi-step speed 0 to 15.

2 15
Output 3 14
frequency 1 4 5 6 13
0
7
8
9
10 12 time
Terminal 11
status
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
time

-157-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

When F00.06 and F00.07 are not 6 (PLC setting) and 7 (multi-speed setting); F00.06 and
F00.07 are not 8 (PID setting) and F09.00 (PID given ) is not 5 (multi-speed given); F04.00
is not 5 (V/F separation) and F04.27 is not equal to 5 (multi-speed given voltage), the multi-
speed is preference to other setting, if DI1,DI2, DI3, DI4 all for OFF, the frequency input
mode are selected by F00.06 and F00.07. If DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4 all not for OFF, then
according to the multi-speed 0 ~ 15 period of speed.

When one of the F00.06, F00.07 is 6 or 7, the frequency input mode is selected by the
F00.06 and the F00.07, the multi-speed can set 0~15 segment speed.

DI1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

DI2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
DI3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
DI4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
STEP 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
F0B. 2n ( 1 <n <17) setting range: -100.0~100.0%
F0B.2n+1(1<n<17)setting range: 0.0~6553.5s(s/min)

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
Simple PLC 0-7 step
F0B.34 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○
ACC/DEC time

Simple PLC 8-15 step

F0B.35 0x0000~0xFFFF 0x0000 ○
ACC/DEC time

The Detail Description Table

Function Bit Segment Acc and Acc and Acc and Acc and
code Dec time1 Dec time2 Dec time3 Dec time4
BIT1 BIT0 0 00 01 10 11
BIT3 BIT2 1 00 01 10 11
BIT5 BIT4 2 00 01 10 11
BIT7 BIT6 3 00 01 10 11
F0B.34
BIT9 BIT8 4 00 01 10 11
BIT11 BIT10 5 00 01 10 11
BIT13 BIT12 6 00 01 10 11
BIT15 BIT14 7 00 01 10 11
BIT1 BIT0 8 00 01 10 11
BIT3 BIT2 9 00 01 10 11
BIT5 BIT4 10 00 01 10 11
BIT7 BIT6 11 00 01 10 11
F0B.35
BIT9 BIT8 12 00 01 10 11
BIT11 BIT10 13 00 01 10 11
BIT13 BIT12 14 00 01 10 11
BIT15 BIT14 15 00 01 10 11

Users choose the appropriate section of the acc/ dec time, the combination of the 16 binary
number convert into sixteen decimal numbers, and setting the corresponding function code.

-158-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0B.36 PLC restart 0~2 0 ◎

0: Restart from the first stop. Running stop (caused by the stop command ,causes or
power-fail), it restart from the first stage.

1: Continue to run from the stage range frequency. Running stop(due to stop command or
fault), the drive automatically records the current phase running time, re-start automatically
enter the stage, which defined frequency to continue running the remaining time.

2: Continue to run from the running frequency.The AC drive not only automatically records
the running time of the current stage but also the running frequency of the shutdown
time.After restarting, the running frequency is restored to frequency at the stop moment,
and continue running follow with the the remaining time of the stage.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0B.37 Multi-step time unit 0~1 0 ◎

0: S: The various stages of running time by seconds.

1: Min: The various stages of running time by minutes .

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0B.38 Multi-step speed 0 source 0~7 0 ◎

0: Set by F0B.02

1: Keypad digital setting

2: Keypad potentiometer setting

3: Analog AI1 setting

4: Analog AI2 setting

5: Analog AI3 setting

6: High-speed pulse HDI1 setting

7: MODBUS Communication setting

It determines the setting channel of reference 0. You can perform convenient switchover
between the setting channels. When multi-reference or simple PLC is used as frequency
source, the switchover between two frequency sources can be realized easily

-159-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Group F0C Protection Parameter Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

F0C.00 Phase loss protection 0x00~0x11 0x11 ○

This parameter setting is used to select whether input phase and input phase loss
protection.
F0C.00 Phase Protection Instruction

Phase Protection Instruction

0: Input phase loss protection disable
LED ones
1: Input phase loss protection enable
0: Input phase loss protection disable
LED tens
1: Input phase loss protection enable

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Frequency decreasing
F0C.01 at sudden power loss 0~1 0 ○

0: frequency decreasing at sudden power loss enable.

1: frequency decreasing at sudden power loss disable

This parameter setting is used to select frequency decreasing at sudden power function
valid or invalid.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Frequency decreasing 10.00

F0C.02 0.00Hz~F00.03/s (max. frequency) Hz/s ◎
ratio at sudden power loss

Setting range: 0.00Hz/s~F00.03/s(Max. output frequency)

When F0C.01=1, frequency decreasing at sudden power loss function is valid. After the
power grid shut down, the momentary power bus voltage drops down, AC drive start
according to momentary power frequency decreasing rate (F0C.02) reduce the operating
frequency, the motor in the power feedback status , so feed the energy to maintain the bus
voltage at a certain voltage point(as show the table below), which can avoid the drive
malfunction due to bus undervoltage and free parking, especially for high inertia loads,
motor coasts to stop after a long time to stop down, affecting the normal run. When the
power grid timely recovery, the output frequency continues to run until the command
frequency return to the normal state.
Voltage level 220V 380V
frequency decreasing at sudden power loss point 260V 460V

-160-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Note: Adjusting this parameter appropriately can avoid the grid switching, as a result of the
AC drive to protect production downtime. It must be prohibit input phase protection in order
to enable this function.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Over-voltage
F0C.03 0~1 1 ○
stall protection

0: Invalid

1: Valid

Setting the valid of the overvoltage stall protection function.

Output current

Overvoltage
stall point

time
Output
frequency

time

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
120%
Voltage protection (220V)
F0C.04 120~150%(AC drive standard bus voltage ) ○
of over-voltage stall 130%
(380V)

This parameter set over-voltage stall protection points. When the bus voltage exceeds the
over-voltage protection point voltage, the AC drive adjust output frequency in order to avoid
the increase of bus voltage in the power generation state. The frequency acceleration will
be further increased if the AC drive is in the acceleration state. The AC drive frequency
output will increase in a constant speed state. It will remain constant in a deceleration
state.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Current limit 0: Disable

F0C.05 action selection 1: Enable 1 ◎

166%(G-type load)
F0C.06 Automatic current limit 50.0~200.0% ○
120%(P-type load)

-161-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Frequency decreasing 10.00

F0C.07 ratio during current limit 0.00~50.00Hz/s Hz/s ◎

During the AC drive in the accelerate operation, the load too large lead to international
motor speed is lower than the increase rate of the output frequency. If without take
measures, it will result in accelerated over-current fault and caused the drive trip.

Comparison the limit protection during the operation of the AC drive by detecting the output
current and the current limit level F0C.06, when the level exceeds the limit as well as in the
acceleration running, the AC drive running steadily. If it constant speed operation, the AC
drive drop-run. If it sustained over current limit level, the output frequency will continue to
fall until to the lower limit frequency. When detected again the output current is below the
current limit level, the continue to accelerate running.
Output current A
Current limi Output current
pointt Overload
pre-alarm point

time time
Output frequency
Setting
frequency

D01 Pre-alarmt
T1 T2
time time
Acceleration Constant
speed speed
F0C.05~F0C.07 Group F0C.08~F0C.10 Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0C.08 Phase loss protection 0x000~0x111 0x000 ○

G type:160%
Overload pre-alarm
F0C.09 F0C.12~200% ○
detection
P type: 120%

Overload pre-alarm
F0C.10 0.1~60.0s 1.0s ○
detection time

The AC drive or motor output current greater than the overload pre-alarm detection level
(F0C.09), and the duration exceeds the overload warning delay time (F0C.10), the output
overload warning signal.

F0C.08 setting range: Enable and define the AC drive and motor overload alarm function.
Setting range: 0x000~0x131:

-162-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

F0C.08 Parameter set Function Instruction

AC drive or Motor overload Pre-alarm

0: Overload pre-alarm of the motor, relative to the rated current of the motor.
LED ones 1: Overload pre-alarm of the AC drive relative to the rated current of the AC drive.
0: The AC drive continues to work after under load pre-alarm
LED tens 1: The AC drive continues to work after underload pre-alarm and the AC drive stops
to run after overload fault
0: Detection all the time
LED hundreds 1: Detection in constant running

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Underload pre-alarm
F0C.11 0x000~0x111 0x100 ○
of motor/AC drive

During the AC drive in the accelerate operation, the load too large lead to international
motor speed is lower than the increase rate of the output frequency. If without take
measures, it will result in accelerated over-current fault and caused the drive trip.

Comparison the limit protection during the operation of the AC drive by detecting the output
current and the current limit level F0C.06, when the level exceeds the limit as well as in the
acceleration running, the AC drive running steadily. If it constant speed operation, the AC
drive drop-run. If it sustained over current limit level, the output frequency will continue to
fall until to the lower limit frequency. When detected again the output current is below the
current limit level, the continue to accelerate running.

F0C.11 Parameter set Function Instruction

AC drive or Motor Underload Pre-warming Selection
0: Motor underload pre-alarm, relative to the motor rated current
LED ones 1: Motor underload pre-alarm, relative to the AC drive rated current
0: AC drive continue running after overload alarm
LED tens 1: AC drive stops after underload fault
0: Detection all the time
LED hundreds 1: Detection in constant running

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Underload
F0C.12 pre-alarm detection 0%~F0C.09 30% ○

Underload
F0C.13 pre-alarm detection time 0.1~60.0s 1.0s ○

AC drive or motor output current is less than underload pre-alarm detection level (F0C.12),
and the duration exceeds the overload warning delay time (F0C.13), output underload
warning signal.

-163-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Output terminal
F0C.14 action during fault 0x00~0x11 0x00 ○

F0C.14 Parameter Set Function Instruction

Fault Output Terminal Action Selection
0: Underload under fault undervoltage
LED ones 1: No action under fault undervoltage
0: Action during automatic reset
LED tens 1: No action during the automatic reset

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Carrier frequency
F0C.15 adjustment selection 0x00~0x11 0x00 ○

F0C.15 Parameter Set Function Instruction

Carrier Frequency Adjustment Selection
0: Fixed carrier frequency
LED ones 1: Carrier frequency automatically adjust as the temperature arises.
0: Fixed carrier frequency
LED tens 1: Carrier frequency automatically adjusted when it is overloaded.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0C.16 PWM mode 0~1 1 ◎

0: Three-phase modulation

1: Three-phase with two-phase modulation switching

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Low frequency
F0C.17 0~1 1 ◎
filter selection

0: Low-frequency carrier invalid

1: Low-frequency carrier valid

When the AC drive in low-frequency running, it can carry out limit or force to reduce carrier
for the low-frequency running carrier , and in order to reduce the effect of PWM wait time
on the output voltage. By setting the parameter F0C.17 enable or prohibit the low-
frequency carrier function.

-164-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0C.18 Reserved 0 0 ●

This parameter is Reserved.

Group F0D Motor 2 Parameter Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

0: V/F control
F0D.00 Motor type 2 control mode 1 ◎
1: Vector mode 0 control

0: G-type (constant torque load)

F0D.01 Load type 1: P-type (variable torque / light load) 0 ◎

0: Ordinary asynchronous motor

(with low-frequency compensation)
F0D.02 Motor type2 1: Frequency asynchronous motor 0 ◎
(without low frequency compensation)

Rated power of motor 2 Model de-

F0D.03 0.1~1000.0kW ◎
pendent

Rated voltage of motor 2 Model de-

F0D.04 0~1200V ◎
pendent

Model de-
F0D.05 Rated current of motor 2 0.8~6000.0A ◎
pendent

Model de-
F0D.06 Rated frequency of motor 2 0.01Hz~F00.03(max. frequency) ◎
pendent

Rated speed of motor 2 1~36000rpm Model de-

F0D.07 ◎
pendent

F0D.08 Stator resistor of motor2 0.001~65.535Ω Model de- ◎

pendent
Model de-
F0D.09 Rotor resistor of motor 2 0.001~65.535Ω pendent ◎

Leakage inductance Model de-

F0D.10 of motor 2 0.1~6553.5mH ◎
pendent
Mutual inductance Model de-
F0D.11 of motor 2 0.1~6553.5mH ◎
pendent
Model de-
F0D.12 Non-load current of motor 2 0.1~6553.5A pendent ◎

F0D.13
~25 Reserved 0 0 ●

Motor 2 overload 0: Invalid

F0D.26 protection selection 1: Valid 1 ◎

Motor 2 overload
F0D.27 protection factor 50.0%~120.0% 100.0% ◎

Reference GROUP F02

-165-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

-166-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group F0E Serial Communication Function Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

Local communication 0~247 (0 is communication address)

F0E.00 1 ○
address

When the address of the machine is 0, the machine will be set up for the host, and send
the Run frequency and start-stop command and start-stop command of the broadcast
machine transmission on the bus. When the host sends a frame address set to 0, that is
broadcast frame. At time all from the machine will accept the frame, buit the engine wthout
response. Communication address of the machine in the network communication has
uniqueness. This is the realization of the host computer and AC drive point to point
communication.

Note: The slave address can not set to 0.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0E.01 Communication baud ratio 0~5 4 ○

0: 1200BPS

1: 2400BPS

2: 4800BPS

3: 9600BPS

4: 19200BPS

5: 38400BPS

Note: PC with AC drive baud rate must be consistent, otherwise, it can not be hearing. The
baud is bigger, the communication is faster .

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0E.02 Digital bit checkout 0~5 1 ○

0: No check(N, 8, 1)for RTU

1: Even check(E, 8, 1)for RTU

2: Odd check(O, 8, 1)for RTU

3: No check(N, 8, 1) for RTU

4: Even check (E, 8, 2) for RTU

-167-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

5: Odd check(O, 8, 1) for RTU

Note:PC with the data format converter setting must be consistent, otherwise,
communication is impossible.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0E.03 Answer delay 0~200ms 5 ○

AC drive data refers to the middle to upper receiving end sends response data interval. If
the response delay less than the system processing time, the response delay time subject
to the system processing. If response delay longer than the system processing time, the
system due to the process data to delayed wait until the response delay time, then send
data for the machine.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Fault time of 0.0: Invalid; 0.1~60.0s

F0E.04 0.0s ○
communication overtime

When the function code is set to 0.0, the communication timeout parameter is invalid.

When the function code is set to a non-zero value, if a communication with the next
communication interval exceeds communication overtime time, the system will report "485
Communcation Fault" (E.CE).

Typically, it will be set to inactive. If continuous communication system, setting this

parameter can monitor the communication status.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Transmission
F0E.05 0~3 0 ○
fault proccessing

0: Alarm and stop freely

1: No alarm and continue to run

2: No alarm and stop according to the stop mode(Only under the communication control)

3: No alarm and stop according to the stop mode(Under all control modes)

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

Communication
F0E.06 processing action selection 0~1 0 ○

-168-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

0: Write with response. The AC drive have response to the read and write command of the
host mechine.

1: Write without response. The AC drive only responds to the read and write command of
the host mechine, and has no response to the write command. The communication
efficiency can be improved by this method.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation

F0E.07 Interval time send by Master 10ms-5000ms 200ms ○

MODBUS Communication
F0E.08 0~2 0 ○
mode selection

When was set in master mode, F0E.07 set the interval time of running frequency and
start/stop command when master send broadcasts to slaves.

0: Standard RTU mode: when it is slave mode(addres is not 0), AC drive will receive and
answer the reading/writing command send by master according to standard MODBUS
RTU.

1: Mode 1: when it is slave mode, (address is not 0), AC drive not only receive and answer
the reading/writing command send by master according to standard MODBUS RTU but
also receive frequency and setting value from the broadcast command 0X20(0X20
command illustrations please refer to Chapters 9) from master.

2: Mode 2: when it is slave mode(address is not 0), AC drive not only receive and anwer
the reading/writing command command send by master according to standard MODBUS
RTU but also receive frequency setting value and start/stop command from the broadcast
command 0X20.

Note:This function is only valid when the address is not 0.When AC drive address is 0, AC
drive is in master mode, and will send frequency and start/stop command to the slave by
passing 0X20 command after the interval F0E.07.

-169-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Group A01 AI Curve Setting Function Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

A01.00 Lower limit of AI 1 0.00V~ A01.02 0.00V ○

Corresponding setting
A01.01 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○
of the lower limit of AI 1

A01.02 Upper limit of AI 1 A01.00~10.00VA01.02 10.00V ○

Corresponding setting
A01.03 of the upper limit of AI 1 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○

A01.04 Ai1 input filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○

A01.05 Lower limit of AI2 -10.00V~ A01.09 -10.00V ○

Corresponding setting
A01.06 -100.0%~100.0% -100.0% ○
of the lower limit of AI2

A01.07 Upper limit of AI2 A01.09~10.00V 10.00V ○

Corresponding setting
A01.08 of the upper limit of AI2 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○

A01.09 Middle value of AI2 A01.05~A01.07 0.00V ○

Corresponding
A01.10 middle setting ofAI2 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○

A01.11 AI2 input filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○

A01.12 Lower limit of AI3 -10.00V~A01.14 0.00V ○

Corresponding setting
A01.13 of the lower limit of AI3 -100.0%~100.0% -100.0% ○

A01.14 Upper limit of AI3 A01.12~10.00V 10.00V ○

Corresponding setting
A01.15 of the upper limit of AI3 -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○

A01.16 Middle value of AI3 A01.12~A01.14 0.00V ○

Corresponding
A01.17 middle setting ofAI3 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○

A01.18 AI3 input filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s ○

A01.19 Keypad analog filter time 0.000~10.000s 0.050s ○

-170-
 SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

AI1 upper
limit point AI1 upper
100% 100% limit point

0%
0V(0mA) 10V(20mA)

0%
AI1 the lower -100%
limit point 0V(0mA) 10V(20mA) AI1 lower
limit point

AI1 input analog correspond curve

AI2, AI3 upper

100% limit point

AI2,AI3
median
point
0%
-10V 0V 10V

AI2,AI3
lower limit
point
-100%

AI2,AI3 input analog correspond curve

Input filter time: Adjusting the sensitivity of the analog input . Appropriate to increase the
amount of simulation can enhance immunity, but will weaken the analog input sensitivity.

Note: Analog AI1 supply input 0~10V/0~20 mA . When AI1 select input 0~20mA, 20mA
corresponding to the voltage is 10V. AI2, AI3 supply input -10~+10V.

A01.19 setting Keypad analog input filter size may have a larger frequency fluctuation that
via Keypad analog reference frequency in some interference occasion. A01.09 appropriate
increase A01.19 can reduce the frequency fluctuation.

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
AI lower than minimum
A01.20 input setting selection 0~111 0x000 ○

AI lower than minimum input setting selection

Ai1 lower than minimum input setting selection:
LED ones
0-corresponding to the minimum input setting; 1-0.0%
Ai2 lower than minimum input setting selection:
LEDtens
0-corresponding to the minimum input setting; 1-0.0%
Ai3 lower than minimum input setting selection:
LEDhundreds
0-corresponding to the minimum input setting; 1-0.0%

-171-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0: No action
1: AI1 channel correction
2: AI2 channel correction
A01.21 AI,AO corrective active 3: AI3 channel correction
4: A01 channel correction 0 ◎
selection
5: A02 channel correction

A01.22 AI1display voltage1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎

A01.23 AI1 measured voltage1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.24 AI1display voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.25 AI1measured voltage2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.26 AI2 display voltage1 -10.000~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.27 AI2 measured voltage1 -10.000~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.28 AI2 display voltage 2 -10.000~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.29 AI2 measured voltage 2 -10.000~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.30 AI3 display voltage 1 -10.000~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.31 AI3 measured voltage 1 -10.000~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.32 AI3 display voltage 2 -10.000~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.33 AI3 measured voltage 2 -10.000~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.34 AO1 display voltage 1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.35 AO1 measured voltage 1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.36 AO1 display voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.37 AO1 measured voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.38 AO2 display voltage1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.39 AO2 measured voltage1 0~10.000V 1.000 ◎
A01.40 AO2 display voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎
A01.41 AO2 measured voltage 2 0~10.000V 9.000 ◎

Take the correction of AI1 as an example:

1)First set A01.21 to 1 to correct the AI1 channel. After setting 1, the parameter is
automatically cleared.

2)Observe the voltage value of the AI1 input through A02.19, record the displayed value
and the measured value of the two points that need to be collected in turn, and then
subparameter input into parameters A01.22-A01.25, the correction of AI1 can be
completed.

3)The AO correction method is the same as the enumerated AI1 method.

-172-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Group A02 Status Check Function Group

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-
code Value cation

A02.00 Setting frequency 0.00Hz~F00.03 0.00Hz ●

A02.01 Output frequency 0.00Hz~F00.03 0.00Hz ●

A02.02 Ramp reference frequency 0.00Hz~F00.03 0.00Hz ●

A02.03 Output voltage 0~1200V 0V ●

A02.04 Output current 0.0~5000.0A 0.0A ●

A02.05 Motor speed 0~65535rpm 0rpm ●

A02.06 Reserved 0 0 ●

A02.07 Reserved 0 0 ●

A02.08 Output Power -300.0~300.0%(the rated current of the motor) 0.0% ●

A02.09 Output torque -250.0~250.0%(the rated current of the motor) 0.0% ●

A02.10 Evaluated motor frequency 0.00~F00.03 0.00Hz ●

A02.11 DC bus voltage 0.0~2000.0V 0V ●

A02.12 Digital input terminals state 0x00~0xFF 0x00 ●

A02.13 Digital output terminals state 0x0~0xF 0x00 ●

A02.14 Digital adjustment 0.00Hz~F00.03 0.00Hz ●

A02.15 Reserved 0 0 ●

A02.16 Linear speed 0~65535 0 ●

A02.17 Length value 0~65535 0 ●

A02.18 Counting value 0~65535 0 ●

A02.19 AI1 input voltage 0.00~10.00V 0.00V ●

A02.20 AI2 input voltage -10.00~10.00V 0.00V ●

A02.21 AI3 input voltage -10.00~10.00V 0.00V ●

A02.22 HDI1input frequency 0.00~50.00kHz 0.00kHz ●

A02.23 PID reference -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ●

A02.24 PID feedback -100.0~100.0% 0.0% ●

A02.25 PID output -100.0~100.00% 0.00% ●

A02.26 Power factor of the motor -1.00~1.00 0.0 ●

A02.27 Current running time 0~65535min 0m ●

Simple PLC and the current

A02.28 step of the multi-step speed 0~15 0 ○

A02.29 ASR controller output -300.0%~300.0%(the rated current of the motor) 0.0% ●

-173-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Function Name Setup range Default Modifi-

code Value cation
0-10.00V
A02.30 AO1 output Note: 1V equals 2 mA when output current 0 ○

0-10.00V
A02.31 AO2 output Note: 1V equals 2 mA when output current 0 ○

A02.32 AC current 0.0~5000.0A 0.0A ●

A02.33 Output torque -3000.0Nm~3000.0Nm 0.0Nm ●

Count value of 0~100 (100 report E.OPL1 fault)

A02.34 0 ●
motor overload

Copy keypad EEPROM

A02.35 0 0 ●
software version

1: Current motor 1
A02.36 The current motor selection 1 ●
2: Current motor 2

A02 group parameters are display quantity, it only supply to the user view and can not be
modified.

-174-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Group A03 DP Parameter Group

Appendix: SDDP01Using Programming

1.System Configuration
After correct install the SDDP01A communication card, it is necessary to configure the host
station and ac drive to establish communication between the host station and the
SDDP01A communication card.

Each PROFIBUS slave on the PROFIBUS bus has a "device description file" called GSD
file that describe the characteristics of the PROFIBUS-DP device. GSD file contain all
device define parameters. That including baud rate support, information length support,
input / output data number and diagnostic data implications.

SDDP01A communication card GSD file(Extension: gsd), GSD file of the communication
card can be downloaded from our website or contact our sales staff. User can copy the
GSD file to the configuration software tools in the relevant subdirectory, the specific
operation and PROFIBUS system configuration method can be found in the related system
configuration software, such as Siemens SIMATIC Manager programming software.

Function Name Setting Range Description Default Modifi

code Value cation
Setting the communication type of
host and slave, corresponding to
A03.00 PPO type 0~4 PPO1 ~ PPO5 message type, the 2 ◎
default is PPO3

DP Slave Setting the address of the DP slave

A03.01 1~127 station in system configuration 1 ◎
address

A03.02 PZD3 Write 0~21 0 ○

A03.03 PZD4 Write 0~21 0 ○
A03.04 PZD5 Write 0~21 0 ○
A03.05 PZD6 Write 0~21 0 ○
A03.06 PZD7 Write 0~21 Receiving from the host to 0 ○
A03.07 PZD8 Write 0~21 the inverter require data 0 ○
A03.08 PZD9 Write 0~21 0 ○
A03.09 PZD10 Write 0~21 0 ○
A03.10 PZD11 Write 0~21 0 ○
A03.11 PZD12 Write 0~21 0 ○

-175-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Name Setting Range Description Default Modifi

code Value cation
A03.14 PZD3 Read 0~54 0 ○
A03.15 PZD4 Read 0~54 0 ○
A03.16 PZD5 Read 0~54 0 ○
A03.17 PZD6 Read 0~54 0 ○
A03.18 PZD7 Read 0~54 The inverter send the 0 ○
A03.19 PZD8 Read 0~54 current state to the host 0 ○
A03.20 PZD9 Read 0~54 0 ○
A03.21 PZD10 Read 0~54 0 ○
A03.22 PZD11 Read 0~54 0 ○
A03.23 PZD12 Read 0~54 0 ○

Note: The function code A03.00~A03.01 setup must be set consistent with the host,
otherwise will affect the success of the system configuration. It is also required that the two
parameters need to be changed again to make the inverter power on; the communication
rate is determined by the system configuration.

2.Transmission Rate and Maximum Transmission Distance

The maximum length of the cable depends on the transmission rate, below table shows the
relationship between the transmission rate and the transmission distance.

Transmission Rate(Kbps) A Type Wire(m) B Type Wire(m)

9.6 1200 1200
19.2 1200 1200
93.75 1200 1200
187.5 1000 600
500 400 200
1500 200 ......

12000 100 ......

Transmission line parameters

Transmission Rate(Kbps) A Type Wire(m) B Type Wire(m)

Impedance (Ω) 135~165 100~130
Capacitance per
unit length(pF/m) ＜30 ＜60

Loop resistance(Ω/km) 110 ......

Core diameter(mm) 0.64 ＞0.53

Core diameter(mm) ＞0.34 ＞0.22

-176-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

3.Profibus-DP Communication Protocol;

Profubus-DP bus allows fast data exchange between host station and inverter. Access to
the inverter device is always accordance with the host-slave mode. AC drive as slave
station, PLC as host station, host and slave periodic data transmission, the data support
PPO1, PPO2, PPO3, PPO4, PPO5 data form. The data block of the PP0 type data format
is divided into two regions, namelyProfubus-DP bus allows fast data exchange between
host station and inverter. Access to the inverter device is always accordance with the host-
slave mode. AC drive as slave station, PLC as host station, host and slave periodic data
transmission, the data support PPO1, PPO2, PPO3, PPO4, PPO5 data form. The data
block of the PP0 type data format is divided into two regions, namely PKW area (the
parameter identification area takes up 8 bytes) and PZD area (the process data area takes
up to a maximum of 24 bytes), where PPO3, PPO4 contains only PZD data.

Each data format support the following functions:

Data Type Support Function PKW/PZD

1. Single function code parameter read and write

operation
PPO1 2. Ac drive command and frequency setting Including PKW area
3. Ac drive status and running frequency read PZD1, PZD2 data

1. Single function code parameter read and write

operation
2. AC drive command and frequency setting
Including PKW area
PPO2 3. AC drive status and running frequency read PZD1~PZD6 data
4. Four communication parameters period write
5. Four communication parameters period read

1.AC drive command and frequency setting

2.AC drive status and running frequency read Only support
PPO3 PZD1,PZD2data

1.AC drive command and frequency setting

2.AC drive status and running frequency read Only support
PPO4 3. Four communication parameters period write PZD1~PZD6 data
4. Four communication parameters period read

1. Single function code parameter read and write

operation
2. AC drive command and frequency setting Including PKW area
PPO5 3. AC drive status and running frequency read PZD1~PZD12 data
4. Ten communication parameters period write
5. Ten communication parameters period read

-177-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Parameter Identification Area (PWK) Description:

PKW data contain three sets of array area, respectively the CMD accounted for 2 bytes,
IND accounted for 2 bytes and VAL accounted for 4 bytes, which can achieve the function
code parameter read and write operation.

Parameter Identification Area(PWK)

Command Code Function Code Reserve Parameter Value

CMD CMD IND IND CMD VAL VAL VAL

Data form such as following:

Host Station Send Data PKW Description AC Drive Response Data Description

Operation command code

0: No operation Response code
1: Function code parameter read 0: No operation
Bit 15:12 2: Function code parameter Bit 15~12 1: Function code parameter
write to RAM read-write correctly
CMD 4: Function code parameter CMD 7: Cannot executed correctly
write to EEPROM

Bit 11~8 Reserve Bit 11~8 Reserve

Bit 7~0 Function code address high 8 bit Bit 7~0 Function code address high 8 bit

Bit 15~8 Function code address low 8 bit Bit 15~8 Function code address low 8 bit
IND IND
Bit 7~0 Reserve Bit 7~0 Reserve

Bit31~16 Reserve Bit31~16 Reserve

VAL Operation success: Return
VAL Reading out of use and writing
parameter value
Bit15~0 indicate function code parameter Bit15： 0 Operation failed: Return
value
error code

Error code summary:

Error Code Name

1 Illegal CMD

2 Illegal Data Add

3 Illegal data value

4 Operation failed

5 Password error

6 Data frame error

7 Parameters only for read

8 Parameters can not be changed during running

9 Password protection

-178-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

Process Data Area (PZD):

PZD area data realizes the data change, the reading and periodical data interaction of the
host station in real-time. The communication address of the data is set by A03 parameter
group, which can realize the control command, and the target frequency real-time
reference in the current status of the inverter, read running frequency and modify
parameter and monitoring parameters in real-time.

Process Data Area (PZD)

PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6 PZD7 PZD8 PZD9 PZD10 PZD11 PZD12

Each PZD data consists of two bytes.

Host station send data PZD

Real-time modification of
Run command of ac drive Target frequency of ac drive function parameters of ac drive

PZD1 PZD2 PZD3

AC drive responds host station data PZD

Real-time read of function

Running state of ac drive Running frequency of ac drive parameters of ac drive

PZD1 PZD2 PZD3~PZD12

Description of host station send data PZD

AC drive run command

(Run command sets as communication and given by DP)
0: No-operation 1: Forward running
2: Reverse Running 3: Forward Jogging
PZD1
4: Reverse Jogging 5: Stop
6: Coast to stop(Emergency shutdown)
7: Fault reset 8: Jogging stop

AC drive target frequency

(frequency source must be set by DP communication reference)
Given range： Depending on the maximum output frequency F00.03,
PZD2
when the setup value is greater than the F00.03, the frequency reference
is not response.

Modify the parameter values in real time,set the parameters through

PZD3~PZD12 A03.02~A03.11 as shown in the following table

-179-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

PZD3~PZD12 Parameter value modify selection setting

Name Value Description

PZD3 0: No-operation
1: Reserve
2: PID setting（0~1000，1000 corresponding 100.0%）
PZD4 3: PID feedback（0~1000，1000 corresponding 100.0%）
4: Torque setting value（-3000~3000，1000 corresponding
100.0% Rated current of motor）
PZD5 5: Forward upper limit frequency setting value（0~Fmax
（Unit：0.01Hz））
PZD6 6: Reverse upper limit frequency setting value（0~Fmax
（Unit：0.01Hz））
7: Upper limit torque of electric torque（0~3000，1000
PZD7 corresponding 100.0% motor current）
8: Upper limit torque of braking torque（0~3000，1000
corresponding 100.0% Rated current of motor）
PZD8 9: Special control command:
Bit0~1：=00: motor 1 =01: motor 2
PZD9 =10: motor 3 =11: motor 4
Bit2: =1 torque control =0: speed control
10: Virtual input terminal command,range: 0x000~0x1FF
PZD10
11: Virtual output terminal command,range: 0x00~0x0F
12: Voltage setting value(V/F separation)
PZD11 （0~1000，1000 corresponding 100.0% Rated voltage of
motor）
PZD12 13: AO or HDO output setting value 1（-1000~1000，1000
corresponding 100.0%）
14: AO or HDO output setting value 2（-1000~1000，1000
corresponding 100.0%）
15: Reserve
16: Manufacturer Barcode 1
17: Manufacturer Barcode 2
18: Manufacturer Barcode 3
19: Manufacturer Barcode 4
20: Manufacturer Barcode 5
21: Manufacturer Barcode 6

AC drive responds host station data PZD

Indicate the PZD data setting state

0: The modification of run command frequency reference or parameter
is correct
1: Run command or frequency reference is incorrect.
PZD1 Bit 15:8
2: The modification of parameter is incorrect
3: The modifications of run command or frequency reference and
parameter are incorrect.

-180-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

AC drive responds host station data PZD

Indicate the current running state of ac drive

1: Forward running
2: Reverse running
Bit 7:0 3: At stopping
4: AC drive failure
5: In POFF state

PZD2 Current running frequency of ac drive

PZD3~ Read the parameter values in real time,set the parameters through
PZD12 A03.14~A03.23 as shown in the following table

PZD3~PZD12 Parameter value read selection setting:

Name Value Description

0: No-operation
PZD3
1: Setting frequency(Hz flash) 2: Bus voltage(V ON)
3: Output voltage (V ON) 4: Output current (A ON)
PZD4 5: Running rotation speed (rpm ON)
6: Output power (% ON) 7: Output torque (% ON)
8: PID reference(% Flash) 9: PID feedback(% ON)
PZD5
10: Input terminal state 11: Output terminal state
12: Torque setting value(% ON) 13: Pulse count value
PZD6 14: Length value
15: PLC current segment number
16: Current segment number of multiple speed
PZD7 17: AI1 value (V ON) 18: AI2 value (V ON)
19: AI3 value (V ON) 20: HDI frequency
21: Motor overload percentage(% ON)
PZD8
22: Inverter overload percentage(% ON)
23: Ramp frequency given value (Hz ON)
PZD9 24: Linear speed 25: AC input current
26: Setting rotation speed 27: Setting linear speed
28: Converter module temperature 29: Reserve
PZD10
30: Running frequency at current fault
31: Ramp reference frequency at current fault
PZD11 32: Output voltage at current fault
33: Output current at current fault
34: Bus voltage at current fault
PZD12 35: The max. temperature at current fault
36: Input terminal state at current fault
37: Output terminal state at current fault
38: Reserve 39: Reserve
40: Manufacturer Barcode 1 41: Manufacturer Barcode 2
42: Manufacturer Barcode 3 43: Manufacturer Barcode 4
44: Manufacturer Barcode 5 45: Manufacturer Barcode 6

-181-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

4. Application Examples
a. Set the function code F0.06 = 11 A channel frequency command is given by DP
communication to 25.00Hz. PPO1 format
Host station send data

CMD IND VAL VAL PZD1 PZD2

0x2000 0x06xx xxxx 0x000B 0x0000 0x09C4

xx-Data does not need to be setting

Here CMD high byte is 0x10 so write to RAM only, the data will not be saved to the
EEPROM. Program execution is written periodically. Be careful when writing data to the
EEPROM in order not to affect its service life.
Note: Some function codes can only be written in standby, write in the operation will
return to the error communication state.
AC drive response data
CMD IND VAL VAL PZD1 PZD2

0x1000 0x0600 0x000 0x000B 0x0003 0x0000

CMD: 0x1000 Data is written successfully

PZD1: 0x0003 The AC drive is in a shutdown state at present
PZD2: 0x0000 The current output frequency of the ac drive is 0Hz

b、AC drive reverse start running and it’s frequency is given to 40.00Hz（PPO3 format）

Host station send data AC drive response data

PZD1 PZD2 PZD1 PZD2

0x0002 0x0FA0 0x0002 0x0FA0

The ac drive correctly responds to the data request of the host station and the current running
frequency reaches 40Hz.
In order to respond to the host's run command, the frequency inverter must be set
F00.01 = 3 or 4,F00.02 = 2.

c、 Communication setting PID reference 90.0%, PID feedback 85.0%, AO1 output
setting 100.0%, AO2 output setting 50.0%; At the same time read setting frequency, bus
voltage, output current and output power（PPO5 format）

To implement this data interaction, you must set the following function code:
A03.02 = 2 PZD3 receive data as PID reference
A03.03 = 3 PZD4 receive data as PID feedback
A03.04 = 13 PZD5 receive data as AO1 output setting
A03.05 = 14 PZD6 receive data as AO2 output setting
A03.14 = 1 PZD3 read setting frequency
A03.15 = 2 PZD3 read bus voltage

-182-
 SD200 User Manual Chapter 6 Parameter Description

A03.16 = 4 PZD3 read output current

A03.17 = 6 PZD3 read output power
F09.00 = 8 PID reference source is set by DP communication
F09.02 = 6 PID feedback source is set by DP communication
F06.14 = 19 AO1 is set by DP communication reference 1
F06.15 = 20 AO2 is set by DP communication reference 2
Host station send data

CMD IND VAL VAL PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6

0x0000 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 0x384 0x352 0x3E8 0x1F4

CMD :Do not operate the functional parameters, IND and VAL no need setting.

Note: The PPO5 data format is used to set the running command and target frequency. For
example, pay attention to PZD1 and PZD2 data setting when running command or target
frequency selection is given by DP Communication ; No need to set PZD1 and PZD2 data
when running command or target frequency selection is not given by DP Communication .

xx-Data no need to setting, please note the settings of PZD1 and PZD2.
AC drive response data

CMD IND VAL VAL PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 PZD6

0x0000 XXXX XXXX XXXX 0x0001 0x1388 0x1388 0x1518 0x33 0x384

PZD1: 0x0001 AC drive is in forward running state

PZD2: 0x1388 AC drive is running at 50Hz
PZD3: 0x1388 The setting frequency of ac drive is 50Hz
PZD4: 0x1518 The bus voltage of ac drive is 540.0V
PZD5: 0x33 The output current of ac drive is 5.1A
PZD6: 0x384 The output power of ac drive is 90.0%

Tips: Due to adopt PPO5 data format support PZD1 ~ PZD12, and without use the PZD7~
PZD12 can do not setting. Keep A03.06~A03.11 = 0, A03.18~A03.23 = 0.

5.Definition of Function Code in Communication

Function Code Group Address Function Code Group Address
F00 Group 0x00 F01 Group 0x01
F02 Group 0x02 F03 Group 0x03
F04 Group 0x04 F05 Group 0x05
F06 Group 0x06 F07 Group 0x07
F08 Group 0x08 F09 Group 0x09
F0A Group 0x0A F0B Group 0x0B
F0C Group 0x0C F0D Group 0x0D
F0E Group 0x0E A00 Group 0x0F

-183-
Chapter 6 Parameter Description SD200 User Manual

Function Code Group Address Function Code Group Address

A01 Group 0x10 A02 Group 0x0F
A03 Group 0x12

6. SDDP01A Communication Card LED Work Status Indicator

There are two indicators (D2 and D3) on the SDDP01A communication card. The two
indicators are used to let the user know the current state of the SDDP01A communication
card in the system. The SDDP01A communication card serves as an intermediate link in
the system to receive the request data sent by the host station and transmit it to the
inverter. After receiving the request, the inverter responds and returns the data to the
SDDP01A communication card, and then returns it to the host station. The SDDP01A
communication card and inverter constitute slave stations of the whole system.

Indicator Status

Name Definition Status Description

Flashing at once per second, indicating that the
current host station communicates with the
SDDP01A card error, the site may have
Flash
Whether the data interference, or the slave station Multi baud rate is
communication of host too low.
station and SDDP01A
D2 communication card is Indicates that the current host station is not set up
normal communication with the SDDP01A card (check
OFF cable connection, configuration address and PPO
data type)

Communication between host station and

Always ON
SDDP01A card is normal.

Flashing at once per second, indicating that the

current host station communicates with the
Flash SDDP01A card error, the site may have
interference
Whether the
communication of Indicates that the current host station is not set up
D3 SDDP01A and ac drive communication with the SDDP01A card (check
is normal OFF hardware connection or whether the inverter
supports DP expansion)

Always ON Communication between host station and

SDDP01A card is normal.

Both flash Flashing four times per second, indicating that the
quickly SDDP01A card hardware fault.
Hardware self-
Just 7s to 10s on the power of the time as the
D2、 D3 detection and
initialization wait for the two LEDs in the OFF
initialization wait
Both OFF state, such as beyond this time is too long to lit
LEDs, it is considered that there is a abnormal
card need to be replaced.

-184-
 Chapter 7
EMC

-185-
Chapter 7 EMC SD200 User Manual

7.1 Definition of Related Terms

1. EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) describes the ability of electronic and electrical
devices or systems to work properly in the electromagnetic environment and not to
generate electromagnetic interference that influences other local devices or systems.In
other words, EMC includes two aspects: The electromagnetic interference generated by a
device or system must be restricted within a certain limit; the device or system must have
sufficient immunity to the electromagnetic interference in the environment.

2. First environment:
Environment that includes domestic premises, it also includes establishments directly
connected without intermediate transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.

3. Second environment:
Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a low-
voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.

4. Category C1 AC drive
Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the first
environment.

5. Category C2 AC drive:
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable
device and, when used in the first environment, is intended to be installed and
commissioned only by a professional.

6. Category C3 AC drive:
PDS of rated voltage less than 1000V, intended for use in the second environment and not
intended for use in the first environment.

7. Category C4 AC drive:
PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1000V, or rated current equal to or above 400A, or
intended for use in complex systems in the second environment.

7.2 EMC Standard Introduction

7.2.1 EMC Standard

SD200 series AC drive to satisfies the requirements of standard EN61800-32: 004

Category C2. The AC drive areapplied to both the first environment and the second
environment.
7.2.2 EMC Installation Environment

The system manufacturer using the AC drive is responsible for compliance of the system
with the European EMC directive. Based on the application of the system, the integrator
must ensure that the system complies with standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2, C3 or
C4.

-186-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 7 EMC

The system (machinery or appliance) installed with the AC drive must also have the CE
mark. The system integrator is responsible for compliance of the system with the EMC
directive and standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2.

Warning
If applied in the first environment, the AC drive may generate radio interference. Besides them
ª
CEcompliance described in this chapter, users must take measures to avoid such interference, if
necessary.

7.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices

3-phase AC power

Breaker

Electromagnetic
AC input AC inputAC Driver AC outputMotor
contactor reactor filter reactor
Figure7-1 EMC external fittings installation diagram

7.3.1 Power Input Installed EMC Input Filter

An EMC filter installed between the AC drive and the power supply can not only restrict the
interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the AC drive, but
also prevents the interference from the AC drive on the surrounding equipment.The SD200
series AC drive satisfies the requirements of category C2 only with an EMC filter installed
on the power input side.

Note:
1. Strictly comply with the ratings when using the EMC filter. The EMC filter is category I
electric apparatus, and therefore, the metal housing ground of the filter should be in good
contact with the metal ground of the installation cabinet on a large area, and requires good
conductive continuity. Otherwise, it will result in electric shock or poor EMC effect.

2. The ground of the EMC filter and the PE conductor of the AC drive must be tied to the
same common ground. Otherwise, the EMC effect will be affected seriously.

3. The EMC filter should be installed as closely as possible to the power input side of the
AC drive.

7.3.1.1 Standard EMC Fliter

The following table lists the recommended manufactures and models of EMC filters for the
SD200 series AC drive. Selecting a proper one based on actual requirements.

-187-
Chapter 7 EMC SD200 User Manual

Recommended Manufacturers and Models of EMC Input Filters

AC drive Model Input AC Filter Model Input AC Filter Model（SCHAF0FNER）

SD200-4T-18.5G 50EBK5 FN 3258 55

SD200-4T-22G 65EBK5 FN 3258 75
SD200-4T-30G 65EBK5 FN 3258 75
SD200-4T-37G 80EBK5 FN 3258 100
SD200-4T-45G 100EBK5 FN 3258 100
SD200-4T-55G 130EBK5 FN 3258 130
SD200-4T-75G 160EBK5 FN 3258 180
SD200-4T-90G 200EBK5 FN 3258 180
SD200-4T-110G 250EBK5 FN 3270H 250

7.3.1 .2 Simple Filter

PE R S T

Line length<300mm

LOAD
Leakage
current
filter
LINE

Figure7-2 Simple filter installation diagram

Simple Filter Selection Table

Input Simple Filter Rated Outline Dimension Installation

AC drive Model Dx Wx H(mm) DimensionDxW(mm)
Filter Model Current A

SD200-4T-18.5G

SD200-4T-22G DL65EB1/10 65 218x140x80 184x112

SD200-4T-30G

-188-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 7 EMC

Input Simple Filter Rated Outline Dimension Installation

AC drive Model Dx Wx H(mm) DimensionDxW(mm)
Filter Model Current A

SD200-4T-37G

SD200-4T-45G DL-120EB1/10 120 334x185x90 304x155

SD200-4T-55G

SD200-4T-75G
DL-180EB1/10 180 388x220x100 354x190
SD200-4T-90G

SD200-4T-110G Without

Simple filter outline and installation dimension as follow:

4.5±0.2

6.5±0.2

6×M6

Install wide 115±0.5

W 130±2
100±2

55±1
M4
13.75±1

Install length
80±0.5 17±1
120±2 35±1
D 157±3 50±2 H

Figure 7-3 Simple Filter Outline and Installation Dimension Figure

7.3.1.3 Amorphous Magnetic Ring ( Common mode choke/ Zero phase reactor)

Figure 7-4 Amorphous magnetic ring appearance

-189-
Chapter 7 EMC SD200 User Manual

Recommended model table as follow, please select the appropriate magnetic ring comply
to the specification of the input and output cable:
Recommended Manufacturers and Models of EMC Input Filters

Ring Manufacturers Model Dimension OD×ID×T

DY644020H 64×40×20

DY805020H 80×50×20

DY1207030H 120×70×30

7.3.2 Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side

An AC input reactor is installed to eliminate the harmonics of the input current. As an
optional device, the reactor can be installed externally to meet strict requirements of an
application environment for harmonics. The following table lists the recommended
manufacturers and models of input reactors.

Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors

AC drive Model AC Input Reactor Model Rated I Input Current A

SD200-4T-18.5G SD-ACL-50-4T-183-2% 50
SD200-4T-22G SD-ACL-80-4T-303-2% 80
SD200-4T-30G SD-ACL-80-4T-303-2% 80
SD200-4T-37G SD-ACL-80-4T-303-2% 80
SD200-4T-45G SD-ACL-120-4T-453-2% 120

SD200-4T-55G SD-ACL-120-4T-453-2% 120

SD200-4T-75G SD-ACL-200-4T-753-2% 200
SD200-4T-90G SD-ACL-200-4T-753-2% 200
SD200-4T-110G SD-ACL-250-4T-114-2% 250

7.3.3 Installation of AC Output Reactor on Power Output Side

Whether to install an AC output reactor on the power output side is dependent on the
actual situation. The cable connecting the AC drive and the motor should not be too long;
capacitance enlarges when an over-long cable is used and thus high-harmonics current
may be easily generated.

If the length of the output cable is equal to or greater than the value in the following table,
install an AC output reactor on the power output side of the AC drive.
Cable length threshold when an AC output reactor is installed
AC drive power(kW) Rated voltage(V) Cable minimum length(m)

4 200~500 50
5.5 200~500 70

-190-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 7 EMC

AC drive power(kW) Rated voltage(V) Cable minimum length(m)

7.5 200~500 100

11 200~500 110
15 200~500 125
18.5 200~500 135
22 200~500 150
≥30 200~690 150

AC output reactor models Recommended models listed below:

Recommended manufacturer and models of AC output reactors

AC drive Model AC Input Reactor Model Rated I Input Current A

SD200-4T-18.5G SD-OCL-50-4T-183-1% 50
SD200-4T-22G SD-OCL-60-4T-223-1% 80
SD200-4T-30G SD-OCL-80-4T-303-1% 80
SD200-4T-37G SD-OCL-90-4T-373-1% 90
SD200-4T-45G SD-OCL-120-4T-453-1% 120
SD200-4T-55G SD-OCL-150-4T-553-1% 150
SD200-4T-75G SD-OCL-200-4T-753-1% 200
SD200-4T-90G SD-OCL-250-4T-114-1% 250
SD200-4T-110G SD-OCL-250-4T-114-1% 250

7.4 Shielded Cable

7.4.1 Requirements for Shielded Cable
The shielded cable must be used to satisfy the EMC requirements of CE marking. Shielded
cables are classified into three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable. If conductivity of
the cable shield is not sufficient, add an independent PE cable, or use a four-conductor
cable, of which one phase conductor is PE cable.

The three-conductor cable and four-conductor are shown in the following figure:

PE conductor
and shield Shield Shield

PE PE

Figure 7-5 Shielded cable with shielding

-191-
Chapter 7 EMC SD200 User Manual

To suppress emission and conduction of the radio frequency interference effectively, the
shield of the shielded cable is cooper braid. The braided density of the cooper braid should
be greater than 90% to enhance the shield-ing efficiency and conductivity, as shown in the
following figure.

Insulation Copper shield Copper braid

Internal insulation
Cable core

Figure 7-6 Shielded cable with shielding

The following figure shows the grounding method of the shielded cable:

Shielding layer
grounding

Note:
1. Symmetrical shielded cable is recommended. The four-conductor shielded cable can
also be used as an input cable.

2. The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short
as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive
current of the cable. If the motor cable is over 100 meters long, an output filter or reactor is
required.

3. It is recommended that all control cables be shielded.

4. It is recommended that a shielded cable be used as the output power cable of the AC
drive; the cable shield must be well grounded. For devices suffering from interference,
shielded twisted pair (STP) cable is recommended as the lead wire and the cable shield
must be well grounded.
7.4.2 Cabling Requirements
1. The motor cables must be laid far away from other cables. The motor cables of several
AC drives can be laid side by side.

2. It is recommended that the motor cables, power input cables and control cables be laid
in different ducts. To avoid electromagnetic interference caused by rapid change of the

-192-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 7 EMC

output voltage of the AC drive, the motor cables and other cables must not be laid side by
side for a long distance.

3. If the control cable must run across the power cable, make sure they are arranged at an
angle of close to 90°. Other cables must not run across the AC drive.

4. The power input and output cables of the AC drive and weak-current signal cables(such
as control cable) should be laid vertically (if possible) rather than in parallel.

5. The cable ducts must be in good connection and well grounded. Aluminium ducts canbe
used to improve electric potential.

6. The filter, AC drive and motor should be connected to the system (machinery or
appliance) properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal
in full contact.
Power cable Power cable
o
Min. 200mm 90
Control Min. 300mm
Motor cable
cable
AC drive

Control cable

o
90 Min.500mm Braking resistor cable

Motor cable

Control cable 90
o Min.500mm
Control cable
Power cable

7.5 Requirement for Leakage Current

1. Since the output of AC drive is high-speed pulse voltage, thereby will generate high-
frequency leakage current. To prevent electric shock and fire-induced leakage, please
install the AC drive leakage circuit breaker.

2. Each of the AC drive generate mare than 100mA leakage current, therefore leakage
breaker sensitivity current should choose over 100mA.

3. High-frequency pulse interference may cause leakage circuit breaker malfunction after
receiving interference, it should choose a high-frequency filter leakage circuit breaker.

4. If install several AC drives, each AC drive should provide a leakage circuit breaker.

5. Factors affecting the leakage current as follows:

● The capacity of the AC drive.
● The carrier frequency.
● Type and length of cable.
● EMI filter.

-193-
Chapter 7 EMC SD200 User Manual

6. When the leakage current of the AC drive cause leakage circuit breakers, should operate
as follows:

● Improving leakage breaker sensitivity current value.

● Replacing high-frequency leakage circuit breaker inhibition.
● Reducing the carrier frequency.
● Shorten the output cable lengths.
● Install leakage suppression equipment.
● Optional EMC filter suppresses the leakage current, specific selection guide refer to.

7.6 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems

The AC drive generates very strong interference. Although EMC measures are taken, the
interference may still exist due to improper cabling or grounding during use. When the AC
drive interferes with other devices, adopt the following solutions.

EMC interference problems and treatment methods

Interference Type Treatment methods

Connect
ª the motor housing to the PE of the AC drive.
Connect
ª the PE of the AC drive to the PE of the mains power
Leakage protection
switch trips supply.
Add a safety
ª capacitor to the power input cable.
Add magnetic
ª rings to the input drive cable.

Connect
ª the motor housing to the PE of the AC drive.
Connect
ª the PE of the AC drive to the PE of the mains voltage.
Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable
ª
AC drive interference
during running with magnetic rings.
Add a safety capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the
ª
signal cable with magnetic rings.
Connect the equipment to the common ground.
ª

Connect
ª the motor housing to the PE of the AC drive
Connect
ª the PE of the AC drive to the PE of the mains voltage.
Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable
ª
with magnetic rings.
Communication Add a matching resistor between the communication cable source
ª
interference and the load side.
Add a common grounding cable besides the communication cable.
ª
Use a shielded cable as the communication cable and connect the
ª
cable shield to the common grounding point.

Enlarge
ª the capacitance at the low-speed DI. A maximum of 0.11 uF
capacitance is suggested.
I/O interference
Enlarge the capacitance at the AI. A maximum of 0.22 uF is
ª
suggested.

-194-
 Chapter 8
Troubleshooting and Maintenance

-195-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

8.1 Daily Repair and Maintenance

8.1.1 Daily Maintenance
Ambient temperature, humidity, dust and vibration will affect the aging of the devices in the
AC drive, which may cause potential faults or reduce the service life of the AC drive.
Therefore, it is necessary for daily and periodic maintenance.

Daily maintenance involves:

1. Whether the motor sounds abnormally during running.
2. Whether the motor vibrates excessively during running.
3. Whether the installation environment of the AC drive changes.
4. Whether the AC drive’s cooling fan works normally.
5. Whether the AC drive overheats.

Routine cleaning involves:

1. Keep the AC drive clean all the time.
2. Remove the dust, especially metal powder on the surface of the AC drive, to prevent the
dust from entering the AC drive.
3. Clear the oil stain on the cooling fan of the AC drive.

8.1.2 Periodic Inspection

Perform periodic inspection in places where inspection is difficult.

Periodic inspection involves:

1. Check and clean the air duct periodically.
2. Check whether the screws become loose.
3. Check whether the AC drive is corroded.
4. Check wether the wiring terminals show signs of arcing.
5. Main circuit insulation teat.

Note:
Before measuring the insulating resistance with megameter (500VDC megameter recom-
mended), disconnected the main circuit from the AC drive. Do not use the insulating
resistance meter to test the insulation of the control circuit. The high voltage test need not
be performed again because it has been completed before delivery.

8.1.3 Replacement of Vulnerable Components

The vulnerable components of the AC drive are cooling fan and filter electrolytic capacitor.
Their service life is related to the operating environment and maintenance status.
Generally, the service life is shown as follows:

Component Service Life

Fan 2~3 years
Electrolytic capacitor 4~5 years

-196-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Note:
The standard replace time is the following using time, users can confirm the replace use
age comply to the running time.

◆Environment temperature: The annual average temperature is about 30 degrees.

◆Overload ratio: Under 80%.
◆Running ratio: Under 20 hours per day.

1. Cooling fan
◆ Possible damage reason: Bearing worn, blade aging.
◆ Judging criteria: Whether there are crack on the blade and abnormal vibration noise
upon startup.

2. Filter electrolytic capacitor

◆ Possible damage reason: Input power supply, high ambient temperature, frequency load
jumping, electrolytic aging.
◆ Judging criteria: Whether there is liquid leakage and safe valve has projected. Measure
the static capacitance and insulating resistance.

8.1.4 Storage of the AC drive

For storage of the AC drive, pay attention to the following two aspects.

1. Pack the AC drive with the original packing box provided by Our company.
2. Long-term storage degrades the electrolytic capacitor. Thus, the AC drive must be
energized once every 2 years, each time lasting at least 5 hours. The input voltage must be
increased slowly to the rated value with the regulator.

8.2 Warranty Agreement

1. Free warranty only applies to the AC drive itself.
2. Our company provides 18-momth warranty (starting from the leave-factory date as
indicated on the bar code) for the failure or damage under normal use conditions. If the
equipment has been used for over 18 months, reasonable repair expenses will be charged.
3. Reasonable repair expense will be charged for the damages due to the following
causes:
a. Improper operation without following the instructions.
b. Fire, flood or abnormal voltage.
c. Using the AC drive for non-recommended function.
4. The maintenance fee is charged according to Our company’s uniform standard. If there
is an agreement, the agreement prevails.

8.3 Contents of This Chapter

This chapter tells how to rest faults and view fault history. It also lists all alarm and fault
messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.

-197-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

Danger
ª
Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the AC drive. Read the safety instruction in
chapter safety precaution before working on the AC drive.

8.4 Alarm and Fault Indications

Faults is indicated by LEDs. Seeing Operation Procedure. When TPIP light is on, an alarm
or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal AC drive state. Using the
information given in this chapter, most alarm and fault cause can be identified and
corrected. If not, contact with the Our company.

8.5 Fault Reset

The AC drive can be reset by pressing the Keypad STOP/RESET, through digital input, or
by switching the power light. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be restarted.

8.6 Fault History

Function codes F07.18~F07.23 store 6 recent faults. Function codes F07.24~F07.31,
F07.32~F07.39 ,F07.40~F07.47show drive operation date at the time the latest 3 faults
occurred.

8.7 Fault Instruction and Solution

Instructions as follows when the AC drive is in fault:

1. Check to whether the Keypad display is wrong or not. If not, please contact with the
local Our company office.

2. If nothing wrong, please check F07 and ensure the corresponding recorded fault
parameters to confirm the real state when the current fault occurs by all parameters.

3. Seeing the following table for detailed solution and check the corresponding abnormal
state.

4. Eliminate the fault and ask for relative technicians for help.

5 Check to eliminate the fault and carry out reset to run the AC drive.

-198-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

No. Code Fault Cause Solution

IGBT U phase ♦ The acceleration is too fast . ♦ Increase Acc time.
1 E.out 1 protection
♦ There is damage to the intern- ♦ Change the power unit.
IGBT V phase al to IGBT of the phase. ♦ Check the driving wires.
2 E.out 2 protection ♦ The connection of the driving ♦ Check if there is strong
IGBT W phase wires and the grounding is interference to the
3 E.out 3 protection not good. external equipment
♦ Increase the Acc time.
Accelerating ♦ The acceleration or deceleration ♦ Check the input power.
4 E.oc 1 overcurrent is too fast. ♦ Select the AC drive with a
♦ The voltage of the grid is too low. large power.
♦ The power of the AC drive is too ♦ Check if the load is short
Accelerating low. circuited(the grounding
5 E.oc 2 overcurrent ♦ The load transient or abnormal. short circuited) or the
♦ The grounding is short circuited rotation is not smooth.
or the output is phase loss. ♦ Check the output configur-
Accelerating ♦ There is strong external ation.
6 E.oc 3 overcurrent ♦ Check if there is strong
interference.
interference.
Accelerating ♦ Check the input power.
7 E.ou 1 overvoltage ♦ Check if the DEC time of
the load is too short or the
Decelerating ♦ The input voltage is abnormal. AC drive starts during the
8 E.ou 2 overvoltage rotation of the motor or it
♦ There is large energy feedback.
needs to increase the
Constant energy consumption com-
9 E.ou 3 overvoltage ponents.
Bus under- ♦ The voltage of the power supply ♦ Check the input power of
10 E.LU voltage fault is too low. the supply line.

♦ The voltage of the power supply ♦ Check the input power of

11 E. ol 1 Motor overload
is too low. the supply line.

♦ Increase the Acc time.

♦ Avoid the restarting after
♦ The acceleration is too fast.
stopping.
♦ Reset the rotating motor.
Invertor ♦ Check the power of the
12 E. ol 2 overload ♦The voltage of the power supply
supply line,
is too low.
♦ Select an AC drive with
♦ The load is too heavy.
bigger power,
♦ Select a proper motor.
Input ♦ Phase loss or fluctuation of input
13 E.SPI phase loss ♦ Check input power
R,S,T.

Output ♦ U,V,W phase loss input

14 E.SPO phase loss (or serious asymmetrical three ♦ Check input power
phase of the load)
Rectifying
15 E,OH1 module ♦ Air duct jam or fan damage. ♦ Check input power
overheated

-199-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

No. Code Fault Cause Solution

♦ Ambient temperature is too high.
E,OH2 IGBT ♦ The time of overload running is ♦ Check input power
16 overheated
too long
♦ SI external fault input terminals
17 E.EF External fault ♦ Check input power
action.
♦ Set proper baud rate.
♦ The baud rate setting is incorrect. ♦ Check the communication
♦ Fault occurs to the communica- connection distribution.
485 tion wiring. ♦ Set proper communication
18 E.CF communication ♦ The communication address is address.
fault
wrong. ♦ Change or replace the
♦ There is strong interference to connection distribution or
the communication. improve the anti-interfere-
nce capability.
♦ The connection of the control ♦ Check the connector and
Current- board is not good. repatch.
19 E.LCE detecting fault ♦ Hoare components is broken ♦ Change the hoare.
♦ The modifying circuit is abnormal. ♦ Change the main panel.
♦ The motor capacity does not com-
ply with the AC drive capability.
♦ The rated parameter of the motor ♦ Check the connector and
Motor- does not set correctly. repatch.
20 E.TUE autotuning ♦ The offset between the paramet-
fault ♦ Change the hoare.
ers from autotune and the stand- ♦ Change the main panel.
ard parameter is huge.
♦Autotune overtime.

♦ The connection of the control ♦ Check the connector and

Current- board is not good. repatch.
19 E.LCE detecting fault ♦ Hoare components is broken ♦ Change the hoare.
♦ The modifying circuit is abnormal. ♦ Change the main panel.
♦ The motor capacity does not co- ♦ Change the AC drive
mply with the AC drive capability. mode.
♦ The rated parameter of the motor ♦ Set the rated parameter
does not set correctly. according to the motor
Motor-
20 E.TUE autotuning fault ♦ The offset between the paramet- name plate.
ers from autotune and the stand- ♦ Empty the motor load and
ard parameter is huge. reindentify.
♦ Autotune overtime. ♦ Check the motor connec-
tion and set the parameter.
♦ Press STOP/RESET to
♦ Error of controlling the write and
EEPROM reset.
21 E.EEP operation fault read of the parameters.
♦ Change the main control
♦ Damage to EEPROM.
panel.
♦ Check the PID feedback
PID feedback ♦ PID feedback offline. signal.
22 E.PID outline fault ♦ PID feedback source disappear. ♦ Check the PID feedback
source.
♦ Braking circuit fault or damage to ♦ Check the braking unit and
Braking the braking popes. change new braking pipe.
23 E.BRE circuit fault ♦ The external braking resistor is ♦ Increase the braking
not sufficient. resistor.
♦ The actual running time of the AC ♦ Ask for the supplier and
Running drive is above the internal setting
24 E.End time arrival adjust the setting running
running time. time.

-200-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

No. Code Fault Cause Solution

♦ The AC drive will report the over-

Electronic ♦ Check the load and the
25 E.oL3 load pre-alarm according to the
overload fault overload pre-alarm point.
set value.
♦ Check the Keypad wires
♦ The connection of the Keypad
and ensure whether there
wires is not good or broken.
is mistake.
Keypad ♦ The Keypad wire is too long and
♦ Check the environment
26 E.PCE communication affected by strong interference.
and avoid the interference
fault ♦ There is circuit fault on the
source.
communication of the Keypad
♦ Change the hardware and
and main board
ask for service.

♦ Check the keypad wires

♦ The connection of the keypad
and ensure whether there
wiresis not good or broken.
is mistake.
Parameters ♦ The keypad wire is too long and
27 E.UPE ♦ Change the hardware and
uploadingfault affected by strong interference.
ask for service
♦ Ensure keypad whether support
♦ Change the hardware and
copy function
ask for service
♦ Check the keypad wires
♦ The connection of the keypad and ensure whether there
wires is not good or broken. is mistake.
♦ The keypad wire is too long and ♦ Change the hardware and
affected by strong interference. ask for service
Parameters ♦ Ensure download parameter ♦ Repack-up the data in the
28 E.DnE uploadingfault version whether same with the keypad
control panel software version ♦ Ensure both version are the
♦ Ensure keypad whether same before download,
repack-up parameter please check A2.35
whether same with F07.10

♦ The output of the AC drive

♦ The output of the AC drive is
is short circuited with the
Grounding short circuited with the ground.
29 E.ErH1 ground.
shortcut fault 1 ♦ There is fault in the current
♦ There is fault in the current
detection circuit.
detection circuit.

♦ The output of the AC drive

♦ The output of the AC drive is
is short circuited with the
Grounding short circuited with the ground.
30 E.ErH2 ground.
shortcut fault 2 ♦ There is fault in the current
♦ There is fault in the current
detection circuit.
detection circuit.
♦ Check the load and ensure
it is normal. Increase the
Speed ♦ The load is too heavy or stalled. detection time.
31 E.dEu deviation fault ♦ Check whether the control
parameters are normal.

♦The control parameters of the ♦ Check the load and ensure

synchronous motors not set it is normal.
properly. ♦ Check whether the control
Maladjustment ♦ The autoturn parameter is not parameter is set properly
32 E.STo fault right. or not.
♦ The AC drive is not connected to ♦ Increase the maladjustm-
the motor. ent detection time.

-201-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

No. Code Fault Cause Solution

♦ Check encoder connec-
♦ Closed loop control, encoder
Encoder tion, reconnected circuit.
33 E.Esd1 signal disconnect.
disconnect fault ♦ Check whether the enco-
♦ Encoder damage.
er is input or output.

♦ Closed loop control, encoder

Encoder ♦ Check encoder connection,
34 E.Ecd2 reverse fault disconnection, damage or conn-
adjust wiring.
ect fault.
♦ Check the motor and main-
♦ Motor long-term overload running
tain.
Motor or abnormal, temperature detect
♦ Check whether normal the
35 E.Ptc overheated resistance.
fault temperature sensor.
♦ Motor overheated improper prote-
♦ Reset the motor overheat-
ction point.
ed protection point.

♦ The AC drive will report the unde-

Electronic ♦ Check the load and the un-
36 E.LL underload fault rload pre-alarm according to the
derload pre-alarm point.
set value.
♦ Set proper baud rate.
♦ check the interface line of
♦ Improper setting of baud rate, communication.
♦ Communication line fault, ♦ set correct communication
E.dp Dp Commun- ♦ Wrong communication address,
37 ication Fault address.
♦ Strong interference towards ♦ change or replace the line
communication to improve the ability to
resist the interference.

♦ Set proper baud rate.

♦ check the interface line of
♦ Improper setting of baud rate, communication.
♦ Communication line fault, ♦ set correct communication
Can Commun- ♦ Wrong communication address,
38 E.cAN ication fault address.
♦ Strong interference towards ♦ change or replace the line
communication to improve the ability to
resist the interference.

-202-
 Motor does not work

N Whether the contactor N

Whether the POWER is light Switch on the
and the keypad has displaying
is switched on when the
input side is empty air contactor

Y Y
Normal
SD200 User Manual

Y Wether the fault

Settle Check the voltage
Normal running information displays of the grid AC drive fault
the fault on the keypad

N Abnormal
Normal Communication

Rest the parameter and N Whether the com- Check the running Terminal Check the voltage
check whether work normally munication param Normal running
8.8.1 The Motor does not Work

eter setting is correct command channel of the grid

Abnormal
8.8 Common Fault Analysis

Correct Keypad Normal

Normal Whether work normally
Normal Normal Check whether the input N
Normal Whether the after switching on the
communication running Press RUN terminal is normal terminal
running configuration correct

Abnormal Abnormal Y Abnormal

-203-
Whether the running is normal Abnormal
Whether the speed N after setting the speed Normal
setting command is right command normally running

Y
Abnormal
Check the voltage of
AC drive fault
UVW

Normal
Whether the motor N Wire the motor
configuration is right correctly

Y
N Whether the load Y Please reduce
Motor fault is too heavy the road
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

8.8.2 Motor Vibration

Motor vibration
or noise

Whether the motor parameters N Set right motor

and motor type are correct typeand
parameters
Y

Whether carry out N Parameters

parameters autotuning autotuning

Setting V/F oscillation N Set right

parameters correctly parameters
Y

Y Check the
If there is abnormal
reference
vibration frequency reference
frequency
N

If there is abnormal Y
Check the load
vibration the load
N

If it is the AC drive fault, please

contact with our company

8.8.3 Overvoltage

Overload fault OV

Whether the power supply N Ensure the power

voltage in standard range supply meet the
requirement
Y

Whether the UVW is

short circuited with the Y Configure correctly
earth and whether the
configuration is right or not.

Y
Whether it permits
Whether the Acc/Dec Y toshorter the Y Shorter the
timeis to short Acc time Acc time
N N

Check the load Y Whether the load Whether it needs Y Add braking
and modify motor works normally braking options options

N N

If it is the AC drive fault,

please contact with Adjust the braking
our company optionsand the resistence

-204-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

8.8.4 Undervoltage Fault

Undervoltage fault UV

Whether the power supply Y Ensure the power

voltage in standard range supply meet the
requirement
N
Whether the air switch and Y Switch on the air
contactor is abnormal switch and the
or switch off contactor
N

Whether the grid power Y

Adjust the grid
is abnormal

Whether the AC drive Y Find the reason

powers off during running and settle the problem

N
If it is the AC drive fault,
please contact with our
company

8.8.5 Abnormal Heating of the Motor

Check if there is abnormal

heat to the motor

Check if the parameter N Set right

is right or not motor parameters
Y

Check if it needs to carry N Parameter

out parameter autotune autotune
Y
N Check if the AC drive runs
at low speed all the time
Y

Check if it is frequency N Select right motor

AC drive motor
Y

Y
Check if the load is too heavy Low the load
N

Check if the3-phase N
Change the motor
motor is balance
Y

Check if the carrier Y Set proper

frequency is too low carrier frequency
N

Check if the motor Y

Add output filter
wire is too long
N

If it is the AC drive fault, please

contact with our company

-205-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

8.8.6 Overheat of the AC drive

Overheat to
the AC drive

Whether the load is toot big or the Y Lower the load and increase
capacity of the AC drive is too low the AC drive capacity
N
Whether the environment Y Install cooling devices or
temperature is too hot derate the AC drive
N
Whether there is Y If it is the AC drive fault, please
abnormal noise to the fan contact with our company
N
Whether the Y
radiator is blocked Clean the radiator
N
Whether the carrier Y Lower the carrier frequency
frequency is too big
N
If it is the AC drive fault, please
contact with our company

8.8.7 Motor Stall During ACC

Speed loss occurs to the

AC drive during ACC

Check if the ACC time Y

Increase the ACC time
is too short
N
Thicken the motor cables
Check if the voltage Y Shorten the configuration
between the terminals distance and adjust the
is among the range voltage of the reactor
N
Check if the load and Y Check if the motor Y Contact with
inertia is too big is special our company
N N
Reduce the torque of the
load and increase the Y Check if the load Reduce the inertia of the
torque is too big load and increase the
capacity of the AC drive capacity of the AC drive
N
Check if the torque Y
boost is too high Modify the torque boost

N
Check if it performs N
parameter autotume Overcurrent

Y
If it is the AC drive fault, please
contact with our company

-206-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

8.8.8 Overcurrent

Overcurrent

Check if UVW is short

circuit to the earth Settle the short circuit
Y problem and configure
Remove the motor cable and
ensure if there is connected the motor cables rigthly
with the earth
N

Check if the motor is Y

Change the motor
short circuited to the earth
N

Check if the motor parameters N Set right motor type

and motor type are correct and parameters

Check if it needs N
parameters autotune Parameters autotune

Y
Check if the ACC/DEC Y Adjust the
time is too short ACC/DEC time
N

Y Reduce the load and

Check if the load is too heavy increase the capacity
of the AC drive
N

Check if there is Y Clear the

interference source interference source

Check if the torque Y Decrease the

boost is too high torque boost
N

Y
Check if it is V/F control Adjust V/F control

N
Check if the parameter of Y Set right parameters of
current loop and speed
loop are right current and speed loop
N
If it is the AC drive fault, please
contact with our company

-207-
-208-
 Chapter 9
Communication Protocol

9.1 Networking Mode

AC drive in the network mode has two types: single host/multiple slaves mode and single
host/slave mode.

PC PLC

RS232

232/485
Conversion
module
RS485

RS485

AC drive AC drive

Figure 9-1 Single host/slave networking way

-209-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

PC PLC

RS232
232/485
Conversion
module RS485

RS485

AC drive 1 AC drive 2 ...... AC drive n AC drive 1 AC drive 2 ...... AC drive n

Figure 9-2 Single host/Multiple slaves networking way

9.2 Interface Mode

RS485: Asynchronous, half duplex.

The default data format: E-8-1 (parity, 8 data bits, 1 end bit), 19200 BPS. Communication
parameter settings refer to F0E functional groups.

9.3 Protocol Frame Format

MODBUS protocol includes two kinds of transmission mode (RTU and ASCII mode), the
AC drive only support RTU mode, the corresponding data such as the following:
Communication of bytes: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, check bit and end bit. When check digit,
1parity/odd check bit or end bit. When there is no parity bit, the 2 end bits are existent.

Start
bit
BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7 Check
bit
Stop
bit

In the RTU mode, a new frame is always at least 3.5 bytes transmission time interval as a
start. Transmission of the data fields in the order: bundle machine address, operation
command code, data and CRC check word.Transmission of each byte is hexadecimal. The
data frame format as follows:
RTU Data Frame Format
Modbus

Start: Stop:
at least Function Check
at least
3.5-byte Slave code Data 3.5-byte
internal time internal time

1.The head of frame and tail frame through the bus free time greater than or equal to 3.5
bytes defined time frame.

-210-
 SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

2.Clearance between frame after the start, character must be smaller than 1.5 characters
communication time, otherwise the new receiving characters will be treated as new format
head.

3.Data validation sample CRC - 16, the information involved in check, calibration and the
level of bytes to be exchanged after sending.

4.Frame to keep at least 3.5 characters of bus idle time, frame between bus free don't
need to accumulate start and end free.

9.4 Function Protocol

1.Read a single or multiple data（0x03）

ADDR xx
CMD 0x03
High bit of the start xx
Low bit of the start xx
High bit of data number xx
Low bit of data number xx
Check low bit of CRC xx
Check high bit of CRC xx

Read data：Slave responding frame

ADDR xx
CMD 0x03
Byte number N*2 N*2
High bit of data 1 xx
Low bit of data 1 xx
…… xx
High bit of data N xx
Low bit of data N xx
Check low bit of CRC xx
Check high bit of CRC xx

2. Write a single data(0x06)

ADDR xx
CMD 0x06
High bit of register Add. xx
Low bit of register Add. xx
High bit of write data xx
Low bit of write data xx
Check low bit of CRC xx
Check high bit of CRC xx

-211-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

Write data response:

ADDR xx
CMD 0x06
High bit of register Add. xx
Low bit of register Add. xx
High bit of write data xx
Low bit of write data xx
Check low bit of CRC xx
Check high bit of CRC xx

3. Host broadcast frequency and start-stop command(0X20)

ADDR xx
CMD 0x20
High bit of start-stop
xx
commandXX
Low bit of start-stop
xx
command XX
High bit of setting
xx
frequency value XX
Low bit of setting
xx
frequencyvalue XX
Check low bit of CRC xx
Check high bit of CRC xx

4. The error message response

Sometimes, errors occurs during the process of the communication. For example, reading
or writing data to an illegal address, etc., then the slave will not work as a normal read-write
response to reply the host, but send a wrong message frame. Error message frame format
is as follows, where the command code is the result of the operation between highest-bit
(Bit 7) of host operation and 1 ( read error is 0x83 / write error is 0x86).

ADDR xx
CMD 0x83 or 0x86
Error code xx
Check low bit of CRC xx
Check high bit of CRC xx

-212-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

The error code define as follows:

Error Error Descriptions

Code Name
0x01 Illegal CMD Slave received command code is illegal or does not exist

0x02 Illegal Data Add Slave receives operation addis cross-border operation or illegal
Slave received data is not within the scope of the function or the range
0x03 Illegal Data
set by other functional limitations is illegal.
Write operating parameters, set for the function is invalid, for example,
0x04 Operation failed
the function of the input terminals can not duplicate definition
0x05 Password error Written password is different from password set by the user
Slave received data frame length is incorrect or CRC checksum and
0x06 Data frame error
other frames can not be wrong
Parameters Slave received the function of the write operation parameters as
0x07 only for read read-only
Parameters can
Slave in operation of the received write operation functions do
0x08 not be changed
during running not modify theparameters in running
Password Slave has set up a user's password, and failed to pass the
0x09 protection password authentication

4. CRC check
By using RTU frame format , the message contains error detect field that bases on CRC
method. CRC field detects the whole message data. The CRC field is two bytes, including
16 figure binary values. It is calculated by transmission equipment and then added to the
message. The receiving device recalculates the CRC of the received frame and compares
them with the value in the received CRC field. If the two value are different, there is an
error in the communication.

CRC saves 6-bit to CRC register at first. And then, deal with the continuous 8-bit byte of
the message and the current value of the register by transferring one process. Only the 8
bit data of every character is valid for CRC, while the start bit, the end and the odd-even
check bit are all invalid.

During the CRC process : every bit character is single exclusive or (XOR) with the CRC
register data , the result moves to the lowest valid bit , the highest valid bit is filled with 0.
LSB is distilled and detected , if LSB is 1, the CRC register is single exclusive with preset
value, if LSB is 0, nothing happens. The whole process needs to repeat for 8 times. When
the last bit finished, the next 8-bit byte character is single exclusive with the CRC register
current value. The ultima CRC register value is the value since all the byte of the message
has been performed .

unsigned int crc_cal_value(unsigned char*data_value,unsigned char dta_length)

(
int i
unsigned int crc_value=0xffff
while(data_length--)

-213-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

crc_value^=*data_value++
for(i=0;i<8,i++)
(
if(crc_value&0x0001) crc_value=(crc_value>>1)^0xa001
else crc_value=crc_value>>1
)
)
return(crc_value)
)

9.5 Communication Parameters Address

MODBUS communication includes read and write functions of the parameters of the
operation of some special registers read and write operations, which include the control
register, set register, state register and factory information.

9.5.1 The Definition of Communication Parameter Add.

The function code number and parameter label is the representation rule of the parameter
address.

High byte: F00-F0E(F group), A00-A03(A group)

Low byte:：00-FF Low byte:
For example, to access F04.13, the access address of the parameter is 0xF40D.

Function code group Absolute Add. Function code group Absolute Add.
F00 Group 0x00 F01 Group 0x01
F02 Group 0x02 F03 Group 0x03

F04 Group 0x04 F05 Group 0x05

F06 Group 0x06 F07 Group 0x07

F08 Group 0x08 F09 Group 0x09

F0A Group 0x0A F0B Group 0x0B

F0C Group 0x0C F0D Group 0x0D

F0E Group 0x0E A00 Group 0x0F

A01 Group 0x10 A02 Group 0x11

A03 Group 0x12

Note: Because EEPROM is frequently stored, it will reduce the life of EEPROM. Therefore,
some parameters in the mode of communication don't need to store as long as change the
value of RAM. Absolute address in the table corresponds to the high byte of RAM address,
to achieve this function, as long as the absolute address can be done as address high
byte.

-214-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

For example:

The parameter F04.13 is stored in EEPROM , and the address is represented as 0xF40D;

The parameter F04.13 is not stored in the EEPROM, and the address is represented as
0x040D;

The parameter A01.12 is stored in EEPROM , and the address is represented as 0xA10C;

The parameter A01.12 is not stored in the EEPROM, and the address is represented as
0x010C;

Read of both EEPROM address and RAM address are valid.

When read the function code parameters, user can only read the maximum of 16
consecutive address parameters.more than 16, the AC drive will return the illegal data.
When writing function parameter, each can only write a parameter. Users should pay
attention to the setting value that cannot exceed the set range of function
parameters.Function parameters set permissions and function code attributes related
parameters, such as read-only parameter is not writable, the operation cannot be changed
in the running also cannot be written. The password is set by the user, in the case without
decryption, all of the parameters cannot write. User password and parameter autotune
cannot via communication to write. Otherwise, the AC drive will return the fault information.
9.5.2 The Definition of the Special Register Address

Register Function instruction Add. Setting instruction R/W

0001H: Forward running

0002H: Reverse running
0003H: Forward jogging
0004H: Reverse jogging
Control
Control register 2000H 0005H: Dcclerate stop W
register
0006H: Coast to stop(emergency stop)
0007H: Fault reset
0008H: Jogging stop
0009H: Pre-exciting

Setting frequency 3000H 0~Fmax(Unit:0.01Hz) W

-1000~1000
PID reference 3001H (Correspond to -100.0%~100.0%) W

-1000~1000
PID feedback 3002H (Correspond to -100.0%~100.0%) W

-3000~3000
Setting Torque setting 3003H (1000 corresponds to 100.0% o f the W
register rated current of the motor)
The upper limit frequency
3004H 0~Fmax(Unit:0.01Hz) W
setting during forward rotation
The upper limit frequency
3005H 0~Fmax(Unit:0.01Hz) W
setting during reverse rotation
The upper limit torque 0~3000; 1000 corresponds to 100.0%
of electromotion torque 3006H of the current of the AC drive motor) W

-215-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

Register Function instruction Add. Setting instruction R/W

The upper limit torque 0~3000; 1000 corresponds to 100.0%
of braking torque 3007H of the current of the AC drive motor) W

BIT0~1: =00: Motor 1

=01: Motor 2 =10: Motor3
Special control command 3008H BIT2: =1 Torque control W
=0 Speed control

Virtual input
3009H 0x0000~0x00FF W
Setting terminal command
register Virtual input
terminal command 300AH 0x0000~0x00FF W

0~1000; 1000 corresponds to 100.0%

Voltage setting value 300BH of the rated voltage of the motor) W

0~1000
AO 1 output setting 300CH (1000 corresponds to100.0%) W

0~1000
AO 2 output setting 300DH (1000 corresponds to 100.0%) W

0001H: Forward running

0002H: Reverse running
State register 1 6000H 0003H: Stop R
0004H: Fault
0005H: P.OFF state

BIT0: =0: ready for operation

=1: not ready for operation
BIT1~BIT2: =00: motor 1
=01: motor2
BIT3: =0: asynchronous motor
=1: synchronous motor
State State register 2 6001H BIT4: =0: pre-alarm without overload R
register =1: overload pre-alarm
BIT5~BIT6: =00: keypad control
=01: terminal control
=10: communication control

Read the register will return the last

fault of the AC drive corresponding
Fault code 6002H to the code. The fault code comply to R
8.7 to receive the relate fault and
other informations.

AC drive model 8000H SD200-----0xD300 R

Manufacturer bar code 1 8001H Range: 0000~FFFF R
Manufacturer bar code 2 8002H Range: 0000~FFFF R
Factory Manufacturer bar code 3 Range: 0000~FFFF
Information 8003H R
Manufacturer bar code 4 8004H Range: 0000~FFFF R
Manufacturer bar code 5 8005H Range: 0000~FFFF R
Manufacturer bar code 6 8006H Range: 0000~FFFF R

Note:
R characteristic can only read, write invalid and report the address error. W characteristic
can only write. read invalid and report the address error.

-216-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

9.5.3 The Definition of the Special Register Address

Control register
Control register belong to write register. A read command is sent to the register when the
return value is 0. Through the register, the user can control AC drive to start/stop reset and
fault. The control register only in F00.01 set communication operation command channel (3
or 4) write is effective.

Setting register
The group of the setting register belong to write register, the register group send a read
command to return the value of 0.

Setting frequency
By writing to the register, the user can set the operating frequency of the AC drive. Setting
range is 0~F00.03 (maximum frequency). In writing the registers, users should ensure that
instructions for the frequency MODBUS mgiven way (or F00.07 F00.06 9) ,otherwise, it will
returns an error message and settings will failure.

PID reference and feedback

By writing these two registers, the user can set PID given value and returns PID feedback
value to achieve the corresponding process control, set the range -1000~1000
(corresponding to -100.0~100.0%). In write of the two registers, the user should ensure that
instructions for the frequency PID reference way ( F00.06 or F00.07 is set to 8), and PID
given need guaranteed PID given source for the MODBUS (F09.00 is set to 6) and PID
feedback to ensure that PID feedback source set for MODBUS (F09.02 is set to4),
otherwise, it returns an error message and settings will failure, PID control related
information, please refer to F09 group specified.
Special control command
By writing this register, the user can switch the current motor parameter with speed and
torque control. The setting range is BIT0~BIT1 is 0x00~0x01, BIT2 is 0x00~0x01.

Analog input and output terminal

By writing these two registers, the user can make some logic control via analog input and
output terminal function. Virtual output terminal range is 0x00~0x0F. User should ensure
virtual terminal setting is MODBUS(F05.11 is 1), otherwise, it returns an error message and
setting will failure. At that time, the terminal input will be invalid, system only receive the
input of the virtual input terminal as terminal function logic control.Virtual output terminal
can write in any case and won’t back to error message, but it only corresponds to output
terminal select is MODBUS communication analog terminal (F03.01, F03.02, F06.03 or
F06.04 is 23), the write analog output terminal register corresponds to the output terminal
is valid.

-217-
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance SD200 User Manual

Voltage setting value

By writing this register, the user can set the V/F control mode under the V/F curve for the
custom value of the voltage. The setting range is 0~100( corresponding to 0.0~100.0%).
User should ensure the voltage setting channel is MODBUS(F04.27 is 7), otherwise, it
returns an error message and setting will failure.

The output analog setting 1 and 2

By writing these two registers, the user can set the output of the analog AO 1and AO 2
output, the range is0~1000(corresponding to 0.0~100.0%). User should ensure the analog
output selection is MODBUS(F06.14 and F06.15 is 16 or 17), the corresponds output
analog have output. It need to care is the output analog setting1 and 2 register as well as
AO 1 with AO 2 is not correspond, but need to select set.

State register
The group state register is read-noly register, sending the write command will report illegal
data address error code for this register group. User can read via the reorganization
register know AC drive running state, control motor type, running command way and fault
code informations.The fault code explanation refer to the chapter 8.

Factory information
The register group of the factory is read-only register, sending the write command will
report illegal data address error code for this register group. User can via read the AC drive
model register to receive the type of theAC drive, SD 300 model is 0xD300. The factory bar
code is supply to the manufacturers to maintain records of the AC drive.

9.5.4 MODBUS Communication Illustration

It is assumed that the SD200 AC drive is set to the communication command control mode,
MODBUS start AC drive with 30.00Hz frequency reverse running and observe the running
state.

Firstly, setting AC drive to communication command control mode(F00.01 is set to 3), and
the communicationchannel is set to MODBUS communication(F00.02 is set to o).

Host send: 01 06 00 01 00 03 98 0B
AC drive response: 01 06 00 01 00 03 98 0B

Host send: 01 06 00 02 00 00 28 0A
AC drive response: 01 06 00 02 00 00 28 0A

-218-
SD200 User Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Secondly, setting AC drive running frequency command selection is MODBUS (F00.06 is

set to 9), and the setting running frequency is 30.00Hz. When the 30.00 Hz communication,
it setting value is 0x0BBB(decimal is 3000).

Host send: 01 06 00 06 00 09 A9 CD
AC drive response: 01 06 00 06 00 09 A9 CD

Host send: 01 06 30 00 0B B8 81 88
AC drive response: 01 06 30 00 0B B8 81 88

Finally, star AC drive reverse running and read return to AC drive state.

Host send: 01 06 20 00 00 02 03 CB
AC drive response: 01 06 20 00 00 02 03 CB

Host send: 01 03 60 00 00 01 9A 0A
AC drive response: 01 03 02 00 02 39 85

Below is the testing report of serial interface adujsting, baud rate was set as 19200, digital
bit is 8 bits, one even parity, one end bit. Connect AC drive with the COM interface of PC by
convert RS232 into Rs485.

-219-
 Warranty Agreement


The warranty period of the product is 18 months (refer to the bar code on the
equipment body). During the warranty period , if the product fails or damaged
under the condition of normal use by following the instruction, we will be
responsible for free maintenance.
‚Within the warranty period , maintenance will be charged for the damages caused
by the following reasons :
²The damage caused by improper use or repair/modification without prior
permission.
²The damage caused by fire , flood , abnormal voltage , other natural disasters and
second disaster.
²The hardware damage caused by artificial falling or transportation after purchase.
²
The damage caused by the improper operation.
²
The damage or failure caused by the trouble out of the equipment (e.g. : External
device)

ƒIf there is any failure or damage to the product, please fill in the information of the
Product Warranty Card in details correctly.

„The maintenance fee is charged according to the newly adjusted Maintenance

Price List of our company .

In general , the warranty card will not be re-issued. Please keep the card and
present it to the maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance .

†If there is any problem during the service , please contact the agent of our
company or our company directly .

SHENZHEN SINOVO ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

Service Department

Add: 5th Floor,No.D Building ,Huafeng Industrial Zone , Gushu Hangcheng Street ,
Xixiang Town, Bao'an District, Shenzhen City,China
Tel：0755-29784870 Sell Service Certer：0755-29784875
Fax：0755-29784873 P.C.：518000

SHENZHEN SINOVO ELECTRIC TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

-220-
 Product Warranty Card

Add. of corporation：

Name of corporation： Contact person：

Customer
information

P.C.： Tel.：

Product model：

Product Body bar code：

information

Name of agent：

（maintenance time and content)：

Failure
information
Maintenance personnel：

-221-